2007-10-24 Nathan Sidwell <nathan@codesourcery.com>
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gdb / doc / gdbint.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*- texinfo -*-
2 @setfilename gdbint.info
3 @include gdb-cfg.texi
4 @dircategory Software development
5 @direntry
6 * Gdb-Internals: (gdbint). The GNU debugger's internals.
7 @end direntry
8
9 @ifinfo
10 This file documents the internals of the GNU debugger @value{GDBN}.
11 Copyright (C) 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1996, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001,
12 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006
13 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
14 Contributed by Cygnus Solutions. Written by John Gilmore.
15 Second Edition by Stan Shebs.
16
17 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
18 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
19 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
20 Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
21 Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
22 Free Documentation License''.
23 @end ifinfo
24
25 @setchapternewpage off
26 @settitle @value{GDBN} Internals
27
28 @syncodeindex fn cp
29 @syncodeindex vr cp
30
31 @titlepage
32 @title @value{GDBN} Internals
33 @subtitle{A guide to the internals of the GNU debugger}
34 @author John Gilmore
35 @author Cygnus Solutions
36 @author Second Edition:
37 @author Stan Shebs
38 @author Cygnus Solutions
39 @page
40 @tex
41 \def\$#1${{#1}} % Kluge: collect RCS revision info without $...$
42 \xdef\manvers{\$Revision$} % For use in headers, footers too
43 {\parskip=0pt
44 \hfill Cygnus Solutions\par
45 \hfill \manvers\par
46 \hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
47 }
48 @end tex
49
50 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
51 Copyright @copyright{} 1990,1991,1992,1993,1994,1996,1998,1999,2000,2001,
52 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
53
54 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
55 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
56 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
57 Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
58 Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
59 Free Documentation License''.
60 @end titlepage
61
62 @contents
63
64 @node Top
65 @c Perhaps this should be the title of the document (but only for info,
66 @c not for TeX). Existing GNU manuals seem inconsistent on this point.
67 @top Scope of this Document
68
69 This document documents the internals of the GNU debugger, @value{GDBN}. It
70 includes description of @value{GDBN}'s key algorithms and operations, as well
71 as the mechanisms that adapt @value{GDBN} to specific hosts and targets.
72
73 @menu
74 * Requirements::
75 * Overall Structure::
76 * Algorithms::
77 * User Interface::
78 * libgdb::
79 * Symbol Handling::
80 * Language Support::
81 * Host Definition::
82 * Target Architecture Definition::
83 * Target Descriptions::
84 * Target Vector Definition::
85 * Native Debugging::
86 * Support Libraries::
87 * Coding::
88 * Porting GDB::
89 * Versions and Branches::
90 * Start of New Year Procedure::
91 * Releasing GDB::
92 * Testsuite::
93 * Hints::
94
95 * GDB Observers:: @value{GDBN} Currently available observers
96 * GNU Free Documentation License:: The license for this documentation
97 * Index::
98 @end menu
99
100 @node Requirements
101
102 @chapter Requirements
103 @cindex requirements for @value{GDBN}
104
105 Before diving into the internals, you should understand the formal
106 requirements and other expectations for @value{GDBN}. Although some
107 of these may seem obvious, there have been proposals for @value{GDBN}
108 that have run counter to these requirements.
109
110 First of all, @value{GDBN} is a debugger. It's not designed to be a
111 front panel for embedded systems. It's not a text editor. It's not a
112 shell. It's not a programming environment.
113
114 @value{GDBN} is an interactive tool. Although a batch mode is
115 available, @value{GDBN}'s primary role is to interact with a human
116 programmer.
117
118 @value{GDBN} should be responsive to the user. A programmer hot on
119 the trail of a nasty bug, and operating under a looming deadline, is
120 going to be very impatient of everything, including the response time
121 to debugger commands.
122
123 @value{GDBN} should be relatively permissive, such as for expressions.
124 While the compiler should be picky (or have the option to be made
125 picky), since source code lives for a long time usually, the
126 programmer doing debugging shouldn't be spending time figuring out to
127 mollify the debugger.
128
129 @value{GDBN} will be called upon to deal with really large programs.
130 Executable sizes of 50 to 100 megabytes occur regularly, and we've
131 heard reports of programs approaching 1 gigabyte in size.
132
133 @value{GDBN} should be able to run everywhere. No other debugger is
134 available for even half as many configurations as @value{GDBN}
135 supports.
136
137
138 @node Overall Structure
139
140 @chapter Overall Structure
141
142 @value{GDBN} consists of three major subsystems: user interface,
143 symbol handling (the @dfn{symbol side}), and target system handling (the
144 @dfn{target side}).
145
146 The user interface consists of several actual interfaces, plus
147 supporting code.
148
149 The symbol side consists of object file readers, debugging info
150 interpreters, symbol table management, source language expression
151 parsing, type and value printing.
152
153 The target side consists of execution control, stack frame analysis, and
154 physical target manipulation.
155
156 The target side/symbol side division is not formal, and there are a
157 number of exceptions. For instance, core file support involves symbolic
158 elements (the basic core file reader is in BFD) and target elements (it
159 supplies the contents of memory and the values of registers). Instead,
160 this division is useful for understanding how the minor subsystems
161 should fit together.
162
163 @section The Symbol Side
164
165 The symbolic side of @value{GDBN} can be thought of as ``everything
166 you can do in @value{GDBN} without having a live program running''.
167 For instance, you can look at the types of variables, and evaluate
168 many kinds of expressions.
169
170 @section The Target Side
171
172 The target side of @value{GDBN} is the ``bits and bytes manipulator''.
173 Although it may make reference to symbolic info here and there, most
174 of the target side will run with only a stripped executable
175 available---or even no executable at all, in remote debugging cases.
176
177 Operations such as disassembly, stack frame crawls, and register
178 display, are able to work with no symbolic info at all. In some cases,
179 such as disassembly, @value{GDBN} will use symbolic info to present addresses
180 relative to symbols rather than as raw numbers, but it will work either
181 way.
182
183 @section Configurations
184
185 @cindex host
186 @cindex target
187 @dfn{Host} refers to attributes of the system where @value{GDBN} runs.
188 @dfn{Target} refers to the system where the program being debugged
189 executes. In most cases they are the same machine, in which case a
190 third type of @dfn{Native} attributes come into play.
191
192 Defines and include files needed to build on the host are host support.
193 Examples are tty support, system defined types, host byte order, host
194 float format.
195
196 Defines and information needed to handle the target format are target
197 dependent. Examples are the stack frame format, instruction set,
198 breakpoint instruction, registers, and how to set up and tear down the stack
199 to call a function.
200
201 Information that is only needed when the host and target are the same,
202 is native dependent. One example is Unix child process support; if the
203 host and target are not the same, doing a fork to start the target
204 process is a bad idea. The various macros needed for finding the
205 registers in the @code{upage}, running @code{ptrace}, and such are all
206 in the native-dependent files.
207
208 Another example of native-dependent code is support for features that
209 are really part of the target environment, but which require
210 @code{#include} files that are only available on the host system. Core
211 file handling and @code{setjmp} handling are two common cases.
212
213 When you want to make @value{GDBN} work ``native'' on a particular machine, you
214 have to include all three kinds of information.
215
216 @section Source Tree Structure
217 @cindex @value{GDBN} source tree structure
218
219 The @value{GDBN} source directory has a mostly flat structure---there
220 are only a few subdirectories. A file's name usually gives a hint as
221 to what it does; for example, @file{stabsread.c} reads stabs,
222 @file{dwarf2read.c} reads @sc{DWARF 2}, etc.
223
224 Files that are related to some common task have names that share
225 common substrings. For example, @file{*-thread.c} files deal with
226 debugging threads on various platforms; @file{*read.c} files deal with
227 reading various kinds of symbol and object files; @file{inf*.c} files
228 deal with direct control of the @dfn{inferior program} (@value{GDBN}
229 parlance for the program being debugged).
230
231 There are several dozens of files in the @file{*-tdep.c} family.
232 @samp{tdep} stands for @dfn{target-dependent code}---each of these
233 files implements debug support for a specific target architecture
234 (sparc, mips, etc). Usually, only one of these will be used in a
235 specific @value{GDBN} configuration (sometimes two, closely related).
236
237 Similarly, there are many @file{*-nat.c} files, each one for native
238 debugging on a specific system (e.g., @file{sparc-linux-nat.c} is for
239 native debugging of Sparc machines running the Linux kernel).
240
241 The few subdirectories of the source tree are:
242
243 @table @file
244 @item cli
245 Code that implements @dfn{CLI}, the @value{GDBN} Command-Line
246 Interpreter. @xref{User Interface, Command Interpreter}.
247
248 @item gdbserver
249 Code for the @value{GDBN} remote server.
250
251 @item gdbtk
252 Code for Insight, the @value{GDBN} TK-based GUI front-end.
253
254 @item mi
255 The @dfn{GDB/MI}, the @value{GDBN} Machine Interface interpreter.
256
257 @item signals
258 Target signal translation code.
259
260 @item tui
261 Code for @dfn{TUI}, the @value{GDBN} Text-mode full-screen User
262 Interface. @xref{User Interface, TUI}.
263 @end table
264
265 @node Algorithms
266
267 @chapter Algorithms
268 @cindex algorithms
269
270 @value{GDBN} uses a number of debugging-specific algorithms. They are
271 often not very complicated, but get lost in the thicket of special
272 cases and real-world issues. This chapter describes the basic
273 algorithms and mentions some of the specific target definitions that
274 they use.
275
276 @section Frames
277
278 @cindex frame
279 @cindex call stack frame
280 A frame is a construct that @value{GDBN} uses to keep track of calling
281 and called functions.
282
283 @cindex frame, unwind
284 @value{GDBN}'s frame model, a fresh design, was implemented with the
285 need to support @sc{dwarf}'s Call Frame Information in mind. In fact,
286 the term ``unwind'' is taken directly from that specification.
287 Developers wishing to learn more about unwinders, are encouraged to
288 read the @sc{dwarf} specification.
289
290 @findex frame_register_unwind
291 @findex get_frame_register
292 @value{GDBN}'s model is that you find a frame's registers by
293 ``unwinding'' them from the next younger frame. That is,
294 @samp{get_frame_register} which returns the value of a register in
295 frame #1 (the next-to-youngest frame), is implemented by calling frame
296 #0's @code{frame_register_unwind} (the youngest frame). But then the
297 obvious question is: how do you access the registers of the youngest
298 frame itself?
299
300 @cindex sentinel frame
301 @findex get_frame_type
302 @vindex SENTINEL_FRAME
303 To answer this question, GDB has the @dfn{sentinel} frame, the
304 ``-1st'' frame. Unwinding registers from the sentinel frame gives you
305 the current values of the youngest real frame's registers. If @var{f}
306 is a sentinel frame, then @code{get_frame_type (@var{f}) ==
307 SENTINEL_FRAME}.
308
309 @section Prologue Analysis
310
311 @cindex prologue analysis
312 @cindex call frame information
313 @cindex CFI (call frame information)
314 To produce a backtrace and allow the user to manipulate older frames'
315 variables and arguments, @value{GDBN} needs to find the base addresses
316 of older frames, and discover where those frames' registers have been
317 saved. Since a frame's ``callee-saves'' registers get saved by
318 younger frames if and when they're reused, a frame's registers may be
319 scattered unpredictably across younger frames. This means that
320 changing the value of a register-allocated variable in an older frame
321 may actually entail writing to a save slot in some younger frame.
322
323 Modern versions of GCC emit Dwarf call frame information (``CFI''),
324 which describes how to find frame base addresses and saved registers.
325 But CFI is not always available, so as a fallback @value{GDBN} uses a
326 technique called @dfn{prologue analysis} to find frame sizes and saved
327 registers. A prologue analyzer disassembles the function's machine
328 code starting from its entry point, and looks for instructions that
329 allocate frame space, save the stack pointer in a frame pointer
330 register, save registers, and so on. Obviously, this can't be done
331 accurately in general, but it's tractable to do well enough to be very
332 helpful. Prologue analysis predates the GNU toolchain's support for
333 CFI; at one time, prologue analysis was the only mechanism
334 @value{GDBN} used for stack unwinding at all, when the function
335 calling conventions didn't specify a fixed frame layout.
336
337 In the olden days, function prologues were generated by hand-written,
338 target-specific code in GCC, and treated as opaque and untouchable by
339 optimizers. Looking at this code, it was usually straightforward to
340 write a prologue analyzer for @value{GDBN} that would accurately
341 understand all the prologues GCC would generate. However, over time
342 GCC became more aggressive about instruction scheduling, and began to
343 understand more about the semantics of the prologue instructions
344 themselves; in response, @value{GDBN}'s analyzers became more complex
345 and fragile. Keeping the prologue analyzers working as GCC (and the
346 instruction sets themselves) evolved became a substantial task.
347
348 @cindex @file{prologue-value.c}
349 @cindex abstract interpretation of function prologues
350 @cindex pseudo-evaluation of function prologues
351 To try to address this problem, the code in @file{prologue-value.h}
352 and @file{prologue-value.c} provides a general framework for writing
353 prologue analyzers that are simpler and more robust than ad-hoc
354 analyzers. When we analyze a prologue using the prologue-value
355 framework, we're really doing ``abstract interpretation'' or
356 ``pseudo-evaluation'': running the function's code in simulation, but
357 using conservative approximations of the values registers and memory
358 would hold when the code actually runs. For example, if our function
359 starts with the instruction:
360
361 @example
362 addi r1, 42 # add 42 to r1
363 @end example
364 @noindent
365 we don't know exactly what value will be in @code{r1} after executing
366 this instruction, but we do know it'll be 42 greater than its original
367 value.
368
369 If we then see an instruction like:
370
371 @example
372 addi r1, 22 # add 22 to r1
373 @end example
374 @noindent
375 we still don't know what @code{r1's} value is, but again, we can say
376 it is now 64 greater than its original value.
377
378 If the next instruction were:
379
380 @example
381 mov r2, r1 # set r2 to r1's value
382 @end example
383 @noindent
384 then we can say that @code{r2's} value is now the original value of
385 @code{r1} plus 64.
386
387 It's common for prologues to save registers on the stack, so we'll
388 need to track the values of stack frame slots, as well as the
389 registers. So after an instruction like this:
390
391 @example
392 mov (fp+4), r2
393 @end example
394 @noindent
395 then we'd know that the stack slot four bytes above the frame pointer
396 holds the original value of @code{r1} plus 64.
397
398 And so on.
399
400 Of course, this can only go so far before it gets unreasonable. If we
401 wanted to be able to say anything about the value of @code{r1} after
402 the instruction:
403
404 @example
405 xor r1, r3 # exclusive-or r1 and r3, place result in r1
406 @end example
407 @noindent
408 then things would get pretty complex. But remember, we're just doing
409 a conservative approximation; if exclusive-or instructions aren't
410 relevant to prologues, we can just say @code{r1}'s value is now
411 ``unknown''. We can ignore things that are too complex, if that loss of
412 information is acceptable for our application.
413
414 So when we say ``conservative approximation'' here, what we mean is an
415 approximation that is either accurate, or marked ``unknown'', but
416 never inaccurate.
417
418 Using this framework, a prologue analyzer is simply an interpreter for
419 machine code, but one that uses conservative approximations for the
420 contents of registers and memory instead of actual values. Starting
421 from the function's entry point, you simulate instructions up to the
422 current PC, or an instruction that you don't know how to simulate.
423 Now you can examine the state of the registers and stack slots you've
424 kept track of.
425
426 @itemize @bullet
427
428 @item
429 To see how large your stack frame is, just check the value of the
430 stack pointer register; if it's the original value of the SP
431 minus a constant, then that constant is the stack frame's size.
432 If the SP's value has been marked as ``unknown'', then that means
433 the prologue has done something too complex for us to track, and
434 we don't know the frame size.
435
436 @item
437 To see where we've saved the previous frame's registers, we just
438 search the values we've tracked --- stack slots, usually, but
439 registers, too, if you want --- for something equal to the register's
440 original value. If the calling conventions suggest a standard place
441 to save a given register, then we can check there first, but really,
442 anything that will get us back the original value will probably work.
443 @end itemize
444
445 This does take some work. But prologue analyzers aren't
446 quick-and-simple pattern patching to recognize a few fixed prologue
447 forms any more; they're big, hairy functions. Along with inferior
448 function calls, prologue analysis accounts for a substantial portion
449 of the time needed to stabilize a @value{GDBN} port. So it's
450 worthwhile to look for an approach that will be easier to understand
451 and maintain. In the approach described above:
452
453 @itemize @bullet
454
455 @item
456 It's easier to see that the analyzer is correct: you just see
457 whether the analyzer properly (albeit conservatively) simulates
458 the effect of each instruction.
459
460 @item
461 It's easier to extend the analyzer: you can add support for new
462 instructions, and know that you haven't broken anything that
463 wasn't already broken before.
464
465 @item
466 It's orthogonal: to gather new information, you don't need to
467 complicate the code for each instruction. As long as your domain
468 of conservative values is already detailed enough to tell you
469 what you need, then all the existing instruction simulations are
470 already gathering the right data for you.
471
472 @end itemize
473
474 The file @file{prologue-value.h} contains detailed comments explaining
475 the framework and how to use it.
476
477
478 @section Breakpoint Handling
479
480 @cindex breakpoints
481 In general, a breakpoint is a user-designated location in the program
482 where the user wants to regain control if program execution ever reaches
483 that location.
484
485 There are two main ways to implement breakpoints; either as ``hardware''
486 breakpoints or as ``software'' breakpoints.
487
488 @cindex hardware breakpoints
489 @cindex program counter
490 Hardware breakpoints are sometimes available as a builtin debugging
491 features with some chips. Typically these work by having dedicated
492 register into which the breakpoint address may be stored. If the PC
493 (shorthand for @dfn{program counter})
494 ever matches a value in a breakpoint registers, the CPU raises an
495 exception and reports it to @value{GDBN}.
496
497 Another possibility is when an emulator is in use; many emulators
498 include circuitry that watches the address lines coming out from the
499 processor, and force it to stop if the address matches a breakpoint's
500 address.
501
502 A third possibility is that the target already has the ability to do
503 breakpoints somehow; for instance, a ROM monitor may do its own
504 software breakpoints. So although these are not literally ``hardware
505 breakpoints'', from @value{GDBN}'s point of view they work the same;
506 @value{GDBN} need not do anything more than set the breakpoint and wait
507 for something to happen.
508
509 Since they depend on hardware resources, hardware breakpoints may be
510 limited in number; when the user asks for more, @value{GDBN} will
511 start trying to set software breakpoints. (On some architectures,
512 notably the 32-bit x86 platforms, @value{GDBN} cannot always know
513 whether there's enough hardware resources to insert all the hardware
514 breakpoints and watchpoints. On those platforms, @value{GDBN} prints
515 an error message only when the program being debugged is continued.)
516
517 @cindex software breakpoints
518 Software breakpoints require @value{GDBN} to do somewhat more work.
519 The basic theory is that @value{GDBN} will replace a program
520 instruction with a trap, illegal divide, or some other instruction
521 that will cause an exception, and then when it's encountered,
522 @value{GDBN} will take the exception and stop the program. When the
523 user says to continue, @value{GDBN} will restore the original
524 instruction, single-step, re-insert the trap, and continue on.
525
526 Since it literally overwrites the program being tested, the program area
527 must be writable, so this technique won't work on programs in ROM. It
528 can also distort the behavior of programs that examine themselves,
529 although such a situation would be highly unusual.
530
531 Also, the software breakpoint instruction should be the smallest size of
532 instruction, so it doesn't overwrite an instruction that might be a jump
533 target, and cause disaster when the program jumps into the middle of the
534 breakpoint instruction. (Strictly speaking, the breakpoint must be no
535 larger than the smallest interval between instructions that may be jump
536 targets; perhaps there is an architecture where only even-numbered
537 instructions may jumped to.) Note that it's possible for an instruction
538 set not to have any instructions usable for a software breakpoint,
539 although in practice only the ARC has failed to define such an
540 instruction.
541
542 @findex BREAKPOINT
543 The basic definition of the software breakpoint is the macro
544 @code{BREAKPOINT}.
545
546 Basic breakpoint object handling is in @file{breakpoint.c}. However,
547 much of the interesting breakpoint action is in @file{infrun.c}.
548
549 @table @code
550 @cindex insert or remove software breakpoint
551 @findex target_remove_breakpoint
552 @findex target_insert_breakpoint
553 @item target_remove_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
554 @itemx target_insert_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
555 Insert or remove a software breakpoint at address
556 @code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}. Returns zero for success,
557 non-zero for failure. On input, @var{bp_tgt} contains the address of the
558 breakpoint, and is otherwise initialized to zero. The fields of the
559 @code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by @var{bp_tgt} are updated
560 to contain other information about the breakpoint on output. The field
561 @code{placed_address} may be updated if the breakpoint was placed at a
562 related address; the field @code{shadow_contents} contains the real
563 contents of the bytes where the breakpoint has been inserted,
564 if reading memory would return the breakpoint instead of the
565 underlying memory; the field @code{shadow_len} is the length of
566 memory cached in @code{shadow_contents}, if any; and the field
567 @code{placed_size} is optionally set and used by the target, if
568 it could differ from @code{shadow_len}.
569
570 For example, the remote target @samp{Z0} packet does not require
571 shadowing memory, so @code{shadow_len} is left at zero. However,
572 the length reported by @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} is cached in
573 @code{placed_size}, so that a matching @samp{z0} packet can be
574 used to remove the breakpoint.
575
576 @cindex insert or remove hardware breakpoint
577 @findex target_remove_hw_breakpoint
578 @findex target_insert_hw_breakpoint
579 @item target_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
580 @itemx target_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
581 Insert or remove a hardware-assisted breakpoint at address
582 @code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}. Returns zero for success,
583 non-zero for failure. See @code{target_insert_breakpoint} for
584 a description of the @code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by
585 @var{bp_tgt}; the @code{shadow_contents} and
586 @code{shadow_len} members are not used for hardware breakpoints,
587 but @code{placed_size} may be.
588 @end table
589
590 @section Single Stepping
591
592 @section Signal Handling
593
594 @section Thread Handling
595
596 @section Inferior Function Calls
597
598 @section Longjmp Support
599
600 @cindex @code{longjmp} debugging
601 @value{GDBN} has support for figuring out that the target is doing a
602 @code{longjmp} and for stopping at the target of the jump, if we are
603 stepping. This is done with a few specialized internal breakpoints,
604 which are visible in the output of the @samp{maint info breakpoint}
605 command.
606
607 @findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
608 To make this work, you need to define a function called
609 @code{gdbarch_get_longjmp_target}, which will examine the @code{jmp_buf}
610 structure and extract the longjmp target address. Since @code{jmp_buf}
611 is target specific, you will need to define it in the appropriate
612 @file{tm-@var{target}.h} file. Look in @file{tm-sun4os4.h} and
613 @file{sparc-tdep.c} for examples of how to do this.
614
615 @section Watchpoints
616 @cindex watchpoints
617
618 Watchpoints are a special kind of breakpoints (@pxref{Algorithms,
619 breakpoints}) which break when data is accessed rather than when some
620 instruction is executed. When you have data which changes without
621 your knowing what code does that, watchpoints are the silver bullet to
622 hunt down and kill such bugs.
623
624 @cindex hardware watchpoints
625 @cindex software watchpoints
626 Watchpoints can be either hardware-assisted or not; the latter type is
627 known as ``software watchpoints.'' @value{GDBN} always uses
628 hardware-assisted watchpoints if they are available, and falls back on
629 software watchpoints otherwise. Typical situations where @value{GDBN}
630 will use software watchpoints are:
631
632 @itemize @bullet
633 @item
634 The watched memory region is too large for the underlying hardware
635 watchpoint support. For example, each x86 debug register can watch up
636 to 4 bytes of memory, so trying to watch data structures whose size is
637 more than 16 bytes will cause @value{GDBN} to use software
638 watchpoints.
639
640 @item
641 The value of the expression to be watched depends on data held in
642 registers (as opposed to memory).
643
644 @item
645 Too many different watchpoints requested. (On some architectures,
646 this situation is impossible to detect until the debugged program is
647 resumed.) Note that x86 debug registers are used both for hardware
648 breakpoints and for watchpoints, so setting too many hardware
649 breakpoints might cause watchpoint insertion to fail.
650
651 @item
652 No hardware-assisted watchpoints provided by the target
653 implementation.
654 @end itemize
655
656 Software watchpoints are very slow, since @value{GDBN} needs to
657 single-step the program being debugged and test the value of the
658 watched expression(s) after each instruction. The rest of this
659 section is mostly irrelevant for software watchpoints.
660
661 When the inferior stops, @value{GDBN} tries to establish, among other
662 possible reasons, whether it stopped due to a watchpoint being hit.
663 It first uses @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to see if any watchpoint
664 was hit. If not, all watchpoint checking is skipped.
665
666 Then @value{GDBN} calls @code{target_stopped_data_address} exactly
667 once. This method returns the address of the watchpoint which
668 triggered, if the target can determine it. If the triggered address
669 is available, @value{GDBN} compares the address returned by this
670 method with each watched memory address in each active watchpoint.
671 For data-read and data-access watchpoints, @value{GDBN} announces
672 every watchpoint that watches the triggered address as being hit.
673 For this reason, data-read and data-access watchpoints
674 @emph{require} that the triggered address be available; if not, read
675 and access watchpoints will never be considered hit. For data-write
676 watchpoints, if the triggered address is available, @value{GDBN}
677 considers only those watchpoints which match that address;
678 otherwise, @value{GDBN} considers all data-write watchpoints. For
679 each data-write watchpoint that @value{GDBN} considers, it evaluates
680 the expression whose value is being watched, and tests whether the
681 watched value has changed. Watchpoints whose watched values have
682 changed are announced as hit.
683
684 @value{GDBN} uses several macros and primitives to support hardware
685 watchpoints:
686
687 @table @code
688 @findex TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
689 @item TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
690 If defined, the target supports hardware watchpoints.
691
692 @findex TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT
693 @item TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT (@var{type}, @var{count}, @var{other})
694 Return the number of hardware watchpoints of type @var{type} that are
695 possible to be set. The value is positive if @var{count} watchpoints
696 of this type can be set, zero if setting watchpoints of this type is
697 not supported, and negative if @var{count} is more than the maximum
698 number of watchpoints of type @var{type} that can be set. @var{other}
699 is non-zero if other types of watchpoints are currently enabled (there
700 are architectures which cannot set watchpoints of different types at
701 the same time).
702
703 @findex TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT
704 @item TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT (@var{addr}, @var{len})
705 Return non-zero if hardware watchpoints can be used to watch a region
706 whose address is @var{addr} and whose length in bytes is @var{len}.
707
708 @cindex insert or remove hardware watchpoint
709 @findex target_insert_watchpoint
710 @findex target_remove_watchpoint
711 @item target_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
712 @itemx target_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
713 Insert or remove a hardware watchpoint starting at @var{addr}, for
714 @var{len} bytes. @var{type} is the watchpoint type, one of the
715 possible values of the enumerated data type @code{target_hw_bp_type},
716 defined by @file{breakpoint.h} as follows:
717
718 @smallexample
719 enum target_hw_bp_type
720 @{
721 hw_write = 0, /* Common (write) HW watchpoint */
722 hw_read = 1, /* Read HW watchpoint */
723 hw_access = 2, /* Access (read or write) HW watchpoint */
724 hw_execute = 3 /* Execute HW breakpoint */
725 @};
726 @end smallexample
727
728 @noindent
729 These two macros should return 0 for success, non-zero for failure.
730
731 @findex target_stopped_data_address
732 @item target_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
733 If the inferior has some watchpoint that triggered, place the address
734 associated with the watchpoint at the location pointed to by
735 @var{addr_p} and return non-zero. Otherwise, return zero. This
736 is required for data-read and data-access watchpoints. It is
737 not required for data-write watchpoints, but @value{GDBN} uses
738 it to improve handling of those also.
739
740 @value{GDBN} will only call this method once per watchpoint stop,
741 immediately after calling @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}. If the
742 target's watchpoint indication is sticky, i.e., stays set after
743 resuming, this method should clear it. For instance, the x86 debug
744 control register has sticky triggered flags.
745
746 @findex HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
747 @item HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
748 If defined to a non-zero value, it is not necessary to disable a
749 watchpoint to step over it. Like @code{gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint},
750 this is usually set when watchpoints trigger at the instruction
751 which will perform an interesting read or write. It should be
752 set if there is a temporary disable bit which allows the processor
753 to step over the interesting instruction without raising the
754 watchpoint exception again.
755
756 @findex gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint
757 @item int gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint (@var{gdbarch})
758 If it returns a non-zero value, @value{GDBN} should disable a
759 watchpoint to step the inferior over it. This is usually set when
760 watchpoints trigger at the instruction which will perform an
761 interesting read or write.
762
763 @findex HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
764 @item HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
765 If defined to a non-zero value, it is possible to continue the
766 inferior after a watchpoint has been hit. This is usually set
767 when watchpoints trigger at the instruction following an interesting
768 read or write.
769
770 @findex CANNOT_STEP_HW_WATCHPOINTS
771 @item CANNOT_STEP_HW_WATCHPOINTS
772 If this is defined to a non-zero value, @value{GDBN} will remove all
773 watchpoints before stepping the inferior.
774
775 @findex STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT
776 @item STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT (@var{wait_status})
777 Return non-zero if stopped by a watchpoint. @var{wait_status} is of
778 the type @code{struct target_waitstatus}, defined by @file{target.h}.
779 Normally, this macro is defined to invoke the function pointed to by
780 the @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} member of the structure (of the
781 type @code{target_ops}, defined on @file{target.h}) that describes the
782 target-specific operations; @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} ignores
783 the @var{wait_status} argument.
784
785 @value{GDBN} does not require the non-zero value returned by
786 @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to be 100% correct, so if a target cannot
787 determine for sure whether the inferior stopped due to a watchpoint,
788 it could return non-zero ``just in case''.
789 @end table
790
791 @subsection Watchpoints and Threads
792 @cindex watchpoints, with threads
793
794 @value{GDBN} only supports process-wide watchpoints, which trigger
795 in all threads. @value{GDBN} uses the thread ID to make watchpoints
796 act as if they were thread-specific, but it cannot set hardware
797 watchpoints that only trigger in a specific thread. Therefore, even
798 if the target supports threads, per-thread debug registers, and
799 watchpoints which only affect a single thread, it should set the
800 per-thread debug registers for all threads to the same value. On
801 @sc{gnu}/Linux native targets, this is accomplished by using
802 @code{ALL_LWPS} in @code{target_insert_watchpoint} and
803 @code{target_remove_watchpoint} and by using
804 @code{linux_set_new_thread} to register a handler for newly created
805 threads.
806
807 @value{GDBN}'s @sc{gnu}/Linux support only reports a single event
808 at a time, although multiple events can trigger simultaneously for
809 multi-threaded programs. When multiple events occur, @file{linux-nat.c}
810 queues subsequent events and returns them the next time the program
811 is resumed. This means that @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} and
812 @code{target_stopped_data_address} only need to consult the current
813 thread's state---the thread indicated by @code{inferior_ptid}. If
814 two threads have hit watchpoints simultaneously, those routines
815 will be called a second time for the second thread.
816
817 @subsection x86 Watchpoints
818 @cindex x86 debug registers
819 @cindex watchpoints, on x86
820
821 The 32-bit Intel x86 (a.k.a.@: ia32) processors feature special debug
822 registers designed to facilitate debugging. @value{GDBN} provides a
823 generic library of functions that x86-based ports can use to implement
824 support for watchpoints and hardware-assisted breakpoints. This
825 subsection documents the x86 watchpoint facilities in @value{GDBN}.
826
827 To use the generic x86 watchpoint support, a port should do the
828 following:
829
830 @itemize @bullet
831 @findex I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
832 @item
833 Define the macro @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS} somewhere in the
834 target-dependent headers.
835
836 @item
837 Include the @file{config/i386/nm-i386.h} header file @emph{after}
838 defining @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
839
840 @item
841 Add @file{i386-nat.o} to the value of the Make variable
842 @code{NATDEPFILES} (@pxref{Native Debugging, NATDEPFILES}) or
843 @code{TDEPFILES} (@pxref{Target Architecture Definition, TDEPFILES}).
844
845 @item
846 Provide implementations for the @code{I386_DR_LOW_*} macros described
847 below. Typically, each macro should call a target-specific function
848 which does the real work.
849 @end itemize
850
851 The x86 watchpoint support works by maintaining mirror images of the
852 debug registers. Values are copied between the mirror images and the
853 real debug registers via a set of macros which each target needs to
854 provide:
855
856 @table @code
857 @findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL
858 @item I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL (@var{val})
859 Set the Debug Control (DR7) register to the value @var{val}.
860
861 @findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR
862 @item I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR (@var{idx}, @var{addr})
863 Put the address @var{addr} into the debug register number @var{idx}.
864
865 @findex I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR
866 @item I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR (@var{idx})
867 Reset (i.e.@: zero out) the address stored in the debug register
868 number @var{idx}.
869
870 @findex I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
871 @item I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
872 Return the value of the Debug Status (DR6) register. This value is
873 used immediately after it is returned by
874 @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}, so as to support per-thread status
875 register values.
876 @end table
877
878 For each one of the 4 debug registers (whose indices are from 0 to 3)
879 that store addresses, a reference count is maintained by @value{GDBN},
880 to allow sharing of debug registers by several watchpoints. This
881 allows users to define several watchpoints that watch the same
882 expression, but with different conditions and/or commands, without
883 wasting debug registers which are in short supply. @value{GDBN}
884 maintains the reference counts internally, targets don't have to do
885 anything to use this feature.
886
887 The x86 debug registers can each watch a region that is 1, 2, or 4
888 bytes long. The ia32 architecture requires that each watched region
889 be appropriately aligned: 2-byte region on 2-byte boundary, 4-byte
890 region on 4-byte boundary. However, the x86 watchpoint support in
891 @value{GDBN} can watch unaligned regions and regions larger than 4
892 bytes (up to 16 bytes) by allocating several debug registers to watch
893 a single region. This allocation of several registers per a watched
894 region is also done automatically without target code intervention.
895
896 The generic x86 watchpoint support provides the following API for the
897 @value{GDBN}'s application code:
898
899 @table @code
900 @findex i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint
901 @item i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len})
902 The macro @code{TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT} is set to call
903 this function. It counts the number of debug registers required to
904 watch a given region, and returns a non-zero value if that number is
905 less than 4, the number of debug registers available to x86
906 processors.
907
908 @findex i386_stopped_data_address
909 @item i386_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
910 The target function
911 @code{target_stopped_data_address} is set to call this function.
912 This
913 function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
914 Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
915 macro, and returns the address associated with the first bit that is
916 set in DR6.
917
918 @findex i386_stopped_by_watchpoint
919 @item i386_stopped_by_watchpoint (void)
920 The macro @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}
921 is set to call this function. The
922 argument passed to @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} is ignored. This
923 function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
924 Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
925 macro, and returns true if any bit is set. Otherwise, false is
926 returned.
927
928 @findex i386_insert_watchpoint
929 @findex i386_remove_watchpoint
930 @item i386_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
931 @itemx i386_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
932 Insert or remove a watchpoint. The macros
933 @code{target_insert_watchpoint} and @code{target_remove_watchpoint}
934 are set to call these functions. @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} first
935 looks for a debug register which is already set to watch the same
936 region for the same access types; if found, it just increments the
937 reference count of that debug register, thus implementing debug
938 register sharing between watchpoints. If no such register is found,
939 the function looks for a vacant debug register, sets its mirrored
940 value to @var{addr}, sets the mirrored value of DR7 Debug Control
941 register as appropriate for the @var{len} and @var{type} parameters,
942 and then passes the new values of the debug register and DR7 to the
943 inferior by calling @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR} and
944 @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}. If more than one debug register is
945 required to cover the given region, the above process is repeated for
946 each debug register.
947
948 @code{i386_remove_watchpoint} does the opposite: it resets the address
949 in the mirrored value of the debug register and its read/write and
950 length bits in the mirrored value of DR7, then passes these new
951 values to the inferior via @code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and
952 @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}. If a register is shared by several
953 watchpoints, each time a @code{i386_remove_watchpoint} is called, it
954 decrements the reference count, and only calls
955 @code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL} when
956 the count goes to zero.
957
958 @findex i386_insert_hw_breakpoint
959 @findex i386_remove_hw_breakpoint
960 @item i386_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
961 @itemx i386_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
962 These functions insert and remove hardware-assisted breakpoints. The
963 macros @code{target_insert_hw_breakpoint} and
964 @code{target_remove_hw_breakpoint} are set to call these functions.
965 The argument is a @code{struct bp_target_info *}, as described in
966 the documentation for @code{target_insert_breakpoint}.
967 These functions work like @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} and
968 @code{i386_remove_watchpoint}, respectively, except that they set up
969 the debug registers to watch instruction execution, and each
970 hardware-assisted breakpoint always requires exactly one debug
971 register.
972
973 @findex i386_stopped_by_hwbp
974 @item i386_stopped_by_hwbp (void)
975 This function returns non-zero if the inferior has some watchpoint or
976 hardware breakpoint that triggered. It works like
977 @code{i386_stopped_data_address}, except that it doesn't record the
978 address whose watchpoint triggered.
979
980 @findex i386_cleanup_dregs
981 @item i386_cleanup_dregs (void)
982 This function clears all the reference counts, addresses, and control
983 bits in the mirror images of the debug registers. It doesn't affect
984 the actual debug registers in the inferior process.
985 @end table
986
987 @noindent
988 @strong{Notes:}
989 @enumerate 1
990 @item
991 x86 processors support setting watchpoints on I/O reads or writes.
992 However, since no target supports this (as of March 2001), and since
993 @code{enum target_hw_bp_type} doesn't even have an enumeration for I/O
994 watchpoints, this feature is not yet available to @value{GDBN} running
995 on x86.
996
997 @item
998 x86 processors can enable watchpoints locally, for the current task
999 only, or globally, for all the tasks. For each debug register,
1000 there's a bit in the DR7 Debug Control register that determines
1001 whether the associated address is watched locally or globally. The
1002 current implementation of x86 watchpoint support in @value{GDBN}
1003 always sets watchpoints to be locally enabled, since global
1004 watchpoints might interfere with the underlying OS and are probably
1005 unavailable in many platforms.
1006 @end enumerate
1007
1008 @section Checkpoints
1009 @cindex checkpoints
1010 @cindex restart
1011 In the abstract, a checkpoint is a point in the execution history of
1012 the program, which the user may wish to return to at some later time.
1013
1014 Internally, a checkpoint is a saved copy of the program state, including
1015 whatever information is required in order to restore the program to that
1016 state at a later time. This can be expected to include the state of
1017 registers and memory, and may include external state such as the state
1018 of open files and devices.
1019
1020 There are a number of ways in which checkpoints may be implemented
1021 in gdb, e.g.@: as corefiles, as forked processes, and as some opaque
1022 method implemented on the target side.
1023
1024 A corefile can be used to save an image of target memory and register
1025 state, which can in principle be restored later --- but corefiles do
1026 not typically include information about external entities such as
1027 open files. Currently this method is not implemented in gdb.
1028
1029 A forked process can save the state of user memory and registers,
1030 as well as some subset of external (kernel) state. This method
1031 is used to implement checkpoints on Linux, and in principle might
1032 be used on other systems.
1033
1034 Some targets, e.g.@: simulators, might have their own built-in
1035 method for saving checkpoints, and gdb might be able to take
1036 advantage of that capability without necessarily knowing any
1037 details of how it is done.
1038
1039
1040 @section Observing changes in @value{GDBN} internals
1041 @cindex observer pattern interface
1042 @cindex notifications about changes in internals
1043
1044 In order to function properly, several modules need to be notified when
1045 some changes occur in the @value{GDBN} internals. Traditionally, these
1046 modules have relied on several paradigms, the most common ones being
1047 hooks and gdb-events. Unfortunately, none of these paradigms was
1048 versatile enough to become the standard notification mechanism in
1049 @value{GDBN}. The fact that they only supported one ``client'' was also
1050 a strong limitation.
1051
1052 A new paradigm, based on the Observer pattern of the @cite{Design
1053 Patterns} book, has therefore been implemented. The goal was to provide
1054 a new interface overcoming the issues with the notification mechanisms
1055 previously available. This new interface needed to be strongly typed,
1056 easy to extend, and versatile enough to be used as the standard
1057 interface when adding new notifications.
1058
1059 See @ref{GDB Observers} for a brief description of the observers
1060 currently implemented in GDB. The rationale for the current
1061 implementation is also briefly discussed.
1062
1063 @node User Interface
1064
1065 @chapter User Interface
1066
1067 @value{GDBN} has several user interfaces. Although the command-line interface
1068 is the most common and most familiar, there are others.
1069
1070 @section Command Interpreter
1071
1072 @cindex command interpreter
1073 @cindex CLI
1074 The command interpreter in @value{GDBN} is fairly simple. It is designed to
1075 allow for the set of commands to be augmented dynamically, and also
1076 has a recursive subcommand capability, where the first argument to
1077 a command may itself direct a lookup on a different command list.
1078
1079 For instance, the @samp{set} command just starts a lookup on the
1080 @code{setlist} command list, while @samp{set thread} recurses
1081 to the @code{set_thread_cmd_list}.
1082
1083 @findex add_cmd
1084 @findex add_com
1085 To add commands in general, use @code{add_cmd}. @code{add_com} adds to
1086 the main command list, and should be used for those commands. The usual
1087 place to add commands is in the @code{_initialize_@var{xyz}} routines at
1088 the ends of most source files.
1089
1090 @findex add_setshow_cmd
1091 @findex add_setshow_cmd_full
1092 To add paired @samp{set} and @samp{show} commands, use
1093 @code{add_setshow_cmd} or @code{add_setshow_cmd_full}. The former is
1094 a slightly simpler interface which is useful when you don't need to
1095 further modify the new command structures, while the latter returns
1096 the new command structures for manipulation.
1097
1098 @cindex deprecating commands
1099 @findex deprecate_cmd
1100 Before removing commands from the command set it is a good idea to
1101 deprecate them for some time. Use @code{deprecate_cmd} on commands or
1102 aliases to set the deprecated flag. @code{deprecate_cmd} takes a
1103 @code{struct cmd_list_element} as it's first argument. You can use the
1104 return value from @code{add_com} or @code{add_cmd} to deprecate the
1105 command immediately after it is created.
1106
1107 The first time a command is used the user will be warned and offered a
1108 replacement (if one exists). Note that the replacement string passed to
1109 @code{deprecate_cmd} should be the full name of the command, i.e., the
1110 entire string the user should type at the command line.
1111
1112 @section UI-Independent Output---the @code{ui_out} Functions
1113 @c This section is based on the documentation written by Fernando
1114 @c Nasser <fnasser@redhat.com>.
1115
1116 @cindex @code{ui_out} functions
1117 The @code{ui_out} functions present an abstraction level for the
1118 @value{GDBN} output code. They hide the specifics of different user
1119 interfaces supported by @value{GDBN}, and thus free the programmer
1120 from the need to write several versions of the same code, one each for
1121 every UI, to produce output.
1122
1123 @subsection Overview and Terminology
1124
1125 In general, execution of each @value{GDBN} command produces some sort
1126 of output, and can even generate an input request.
1127
1128 Output can be generated for the following purposes:
1129
1130 @itemize @bullet
1131 @item
1132 to display a @emph{result} of an operation;
1133
1134 @item
1135 to convey @emph{info} or produce side-effects of a requested
1136 operation;
1137
1138 @item
1139 to provide a @emph{notification} of an asynchronous event (including
1140 progress indication of a prolonged asynchronous operation);
1141
1142 @item
1143 to display @emph{error messages} (including warnings);
1144
1145 @item
1146 to show @emph{debug data};
1147
1148 @item
1149 to @emph{query} or prompt a user for input (a special case).
1150 @end itemize
1151
1152 @noindent
1153 This section mainly concentrates on how to build result output,
1154 although some of it also applies to other kinds of output.
1155
1156 Generation of output that displays the results of an operation
1157 involves one or more of the following:
1158
1159 @itemize @bullet
1160 @item
1161 output of the actual data
1162
1163 @item
1164 formatting the output as appropriate for console output, to make it
1165 easily readable by humans
1166
1167 @item
1168 machine oriented formatting--a more terse formatting to allow for easy
1169 parsing by programs which read @value{GDBN}'s output
1170
1171 @item
1172 annotation, whose purpose is to help legacy GUIs to identify interesting
1173 parts in the output
1174 @end itemize
1175
1176 The @code{ui_out} routines take care of the first three aspects.
1177 Annotations are provided by separate annotation routines. Note that use
1178 of annotations for an interface between a GUI and @value{GDBN} is
1179 deprecated.
1180
1181 Output can be in the form of a single item, which we call a @dfn{field};
1182 a @dfn{list} consisting of identical fields; a @dfn{tuple} consisting of
1183 non-identical fields; or a @dfn{table}, which is a tuple consisting of a
1184 header and a body. In a BNF-like form:
1185
1186 @table @code
1187 @item <table> @expansion{}
1188 @code{<header> <body>}
1189 @item <header> @expansion{}
1190 @code{@{ <column> @}}
1191 @item <column> @expansion{}
1192 @code{<width> <alignment> <title>}
1193 @item <body> @expansion{}
1194 @code{@{<row>@}}
1195 @end table
1196
1197
1198 @subsection General Conventions
1199
1200 Most @code{ui_out} routines are of type @code{void}, the exceptions are
1201 @code{ui_out_stream_new} (which returns a pointer to the newly created
1202 object) and the @code{make_cleanup} routines.
1203
1204 The first parameter is always the @code{ui_out} vector object, a pointer
1205 to a @code{struct ui_out}.
1206
1207 The @var{format} parameter is like in @code{printf} family of functions.
1208 When it is present, there must also be a variable list of arguments
1209 sufficient used to satisfy the @code{%} specifiers in the supplied
1210 format.
1211
1212 When a character string argument is not used in a @code{ui_out} function
1213 call, a @code{NULL} pointer has to be supplied instead.
1214
1215
1216 @subsection Table, Tuple and List Functions
1217
1218 @cindex list output functions
1219 @cindex table output functions
1220 @cindex tuple output functions
1221 This section introduces @code{ui_out} routines for building lists,
1222 tuples and tables. The routines to output the actual data items
1223 (fields) are presented in the next section.
1224
1225 To recap: A @dfn{tuple} is a sequence of @dfn{fields}, each field
1226 containing information about an object; a @dfn{list} is a sequence of
1227 fields where each field describes an identical object.
1228
1229 Use the @dfn{table} functions when your output consists of a list of
1230 rows (tuples) and the console output should include a heading. Use this
1231 even when you are listing just one object but you still want the header.
1232
1233 @cindex nesting level in @code{ui_out} functions
1234 Tables can not be nested. Tuples and lists can be nested up to a
1235 maximum of five levels.
1236
1237 The overall structure of the table output code is something like this:
1238
1239 @smallexample
1240 ui_out_table_begin
1241 ui_out_table_header
1242 @dots{}
1243 ui_out_table_body
1244 ui_out_tuple_begin
1245 ui_out_field_*
1246 @dots{}
1247 ui_out_tuple_end
1248 @dots{}
1249 ui_out_table_end
1250 @end smallexample
1251
1252 Here is the description of table-, tuple- and list-related @code{ui_out}
1253 functions:
1254
1255 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nbrofcols}, int @var{nr_rows}, const char *@var{tblid})
1256 The function @code{ui_out_table_begin} marks the beginning of the output
1257 of a table. It should always be called before any other @code{ui_out}
1258 function for a given table. @var{nbrofcols} is the number of columns in
1259 the table. @var{nr_rows} is the number of rows in the table.
1260 @var{tblid} is an optional string identifying the table. The string
1261 pointed to by @var{tblid} is copied by the implementation of
1262 @code{ui_out_table_begin}, so the application can free the string if it
1263 was @code{malloc}ed.
1264
1265 The companion function @code{ui_out_table_end}, described below, marks
1266 the end of the table's output.
1267 @end deftypefun
1268
1269 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_header (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{colhdr})
1270 @code{ui_out_table_header} provides the header information for a single
1271 table column. You call this function several times, one each for every
1272 column of the table, after @code{ui_out_table_begin}, but before
1273 @code{ui_out_table_body}.
1274
1275 The value of @var{width} gives the column width in characters. The
1276 value of @var{alignment} is one of @code{left}, @code{center}, and
1277 @code{right}, and it specifies how to align the header: left-justify,
1278 center, or right-justify it. @var{colhdr} points to a string that
1279 specifies the column header; the implementation copies that string, so
1280 column header strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed after the
1281 call.
1282 @end deftypefun
1283
1284 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_body (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1285 This function delimits the table header from the table body.
1286 @end deftypefun
1287
1288 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1289 This function signals the end of a table's output. It should be called
1290 after the table body has been produced by the list and field output
1291 functions.
1292
1293 There should be exactly one call to @code{ui_out_table_end} for each
1294 call to @code{ui_out_table_begin}, otherwise the @code{ui_out} functions
1295 will signal an internal error.
1296 @end deftypefun
1297
1298 The output of the tuples that represent the table rows must follow the
1299 call to @code{ui_out_table_body} and precede the call to
1300 @code{ui_out_table_end}. You build a tuple by calling
1301 @code{ui_out_tuple_begin} and @code{ui_out_tuple_end}, with suitable
1302 calls to functions which actually output fields between them.
1303
1304 @deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1305 This function marks the beginning of a tuple output. @var{id} points
1306 to an optional string that identifies the tuple; it is copied by the
1307 implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1308 after the call.
1309 @end deftypefun
1310
1311 @deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1312 This function signals an end of a tuple output. There should be exactly
1313 one call to @code{ui_out_tuple_end} for each call to
1314 @code{ui_out_tuple_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1315 be signaled.
1316 @end deftypefun
1317
1318 @deftypefun struct cleanup *make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1319 This function first opens the tuple and then establishes a cleanup
1320 (@pxref{Coding, Cleanups}) to close the tuple. It provides a convenient
1321 and correct implementation of the non-portable@footnote{The function
1322 cast is not portable ISO C.} code sequence:
1323 @smallexample
1324 struct cleanup *old_cleanup;
1325 ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "...");
1326 old_cleanup = make_cleanup ((void(*)(void *)) ui_out_tuple_end,
1327 uiout);
1328 @end smallexample
1329 @end deftypefun
1330
1331 @deftypefun void ui_out_list_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1332 This function marks the beginning of a list output. @var{id} points to
1333 an optional string that identifies the list; it is copied by the
1334 implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1335 after the call.
1336 @end deftypefun
1337
1338 @deftypefun void ui_out_list_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1339 This function signals an end of a list output. There should be exactly
1340 one call to @code{ui_out_list_end} for each call to
1341 @code{ui_out_list_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1342 be signaled.
1343 @end deftypefun
1344
1345 @deftypefun struct cleanup *make_cleanup_ui_out_list_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1346 Similar to @code{make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end}, this function
1347 opens a list and then establishes cleanup (@pxref{Coding, Cleanups})
1348 that will close the list.
1349 @end deftypefun
1350
1351 @subsection Item Output Functions
1352
1353 @cindex item output functions
1354 @cindex field output functions
1355 @cindex data output
1356 The functions described below produce output for the actual data
1357 items, or fields, which contain information about the object.
1358
1359 Choose the appropriate function accordingly to your particular needs.
1360
1361 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{fldname}, char *@var{format}, ...)
1362 This is the most general output function. It produces the
1363 representation of the data in the variable-length argument list
1364 according to formatting specifications in @var{format}, a
1365 @code{printf}-like format string. The optional argument @var{fldname}
1366 supplies the name of the field. The data items themselves are
1367 supplied as additional arguments after @var{format}.
1368
1369 This generic function should be used only when it is not possible to
1370 use one of the specialized versions (see below).
1371 @end deftypefun
1372
1373 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1374 This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable. It uses the
1375 @code{"%d"} output conversion specification. @var{fldname} specifies
1376 the name of the field.
1377 @end deftypefun
1378
1379 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1380 This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable. It differs from
1381 @code{ui_out_field_int} in that the caller specifies the desired @var{width} and @var{alignment} of the output.
1382 @var{fldname} specifies
1383 the name of the field.
1384 @end deftypefun
1385
1386 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_core_addr (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, CORE_ADDR @var{address})
1387 This function outputs an address.
1388 @end deftypefun
1389
1390 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_string (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, const char *@var{string})
1391 This function outputs a string using the @code{"%s"} conversion
1392 specification.
1393 @end deftypefun
1394
1395 Sometimes, there's a need to compose your output piece by piece using
1396 functions that operate on a stream, such as @code{value_print} or
1397 @code{fprintf_symbol_filtered}. These functions accept an argument of
1398 the type @code{struct ui_file *}, a pointer to a @code{ui_file} object
1399 used to store the data stream used for the output. When you use one
1400 of these functions, you need a way to pass their results stored in a
1401 @code{ui_file} object to the @code{ui_out} functions. To this end,
1402 you first create a @code{ui_stream} object by calling
1403 @code{ui_out_stream_new}, pass the @code{stream} member of that
1404 @code{ui_stream} object to @code{value_print} and similar functions,
1405 and finally call @code{ui_out_field_stream} to output the field you
1406 constructed. When the @code{ui_stream} object is no longer needed,
1407 you should destroy it and free its memory by calling
1408 @code{ui_out_stream_delete}.
1409
1410 @deftypefun struct ui_stream *ui_out_stream_new (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1411 This function creates a new @code{ui_stream} object which uses the
1412 same output methods as the @code{ui_out} object whose pointer is
1413 passed in @var{uiout}. It returns a pointer to the newly created
1414 @code{ui_stream} object.
1415 @end deftypefun
1416
1417 @deftypefun void ui_out_stream_delete (struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1418 This functions destroys a @code{ui_stream} object specified by
1419 @var{streambuf}.
1420 @end deftypefun
1421
1422 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_stream (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fieldname}, struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1423 This function consumes all the data accumulated in
1424 @code{streambuf->stream} and outputs it like
1425 @code{ui_out_field_string} does. After a call to
1426 @code{ui_out_field_stream}, the accumulated data no longer exists, but
1427 the stream is still valid and may be used for producing more fields.
1428 @end deftypefun
1429
1430 @strong{Important:} If there is any chance that your code could bail
1431 out before completing output generation and reaching the point where
1432 @code{ui_out_stream_delete} is called, it is necessary to set up a
1433 cleanup, to avoid leaking memory and other resources. Here's a
1434 skeleton code to do that:
1435
1436 @smallexample
1437 struct ui_stream *mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1438 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1439 ...
1440 do_cleanups (old);
1441 @end smallexample
1442
1443 If the function already has the old cleanup chain set (for other kinds
1444 of cleanups), you just have to add your cleanup to it:
1445
1446 @smallexample
1447 mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1448 make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1449 @end smallexample
1450
1451 Note that with cleanups in place, you should not call
1452 @code{ui_out_stream_delete} directly, or you would attempt to free the
1453 same buffer twice.
1454
1455 @subsection Utility Output Functions
1456
1457 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_skip (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname})
1458 This function skips a field in a table. Use it if you have to leave
1459 an empty field without disrupting the table alignment. The argument
1460 @var{fldname} specifies a name for the (missing) filed.
1461 @end deftypefun
1462
1463 @deftypefun void ui_out_text (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{string})
1464 This function outputs the text in @var{string} in a way that makes it
1465 easy to be read by humans. For example, the console implementation of
1466 this method filters the text through a built-in pager, to prevent it
1467 from scrolling off the visible portion of the screen.
1468
1469 Use this function for printing relatively long chunks of text around
1470 the actual field data: the text it produces is not aligned according
1471 to the table's format. Use @code{ui_out_field_string} to output a
1472 string field, and use @code{ui_out_message}, described below, to
1473 output short messages.
1474 @end deftypefun
1475
1476 @deftypefun void ui_out_spaces (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nspaces})
1477 This function outputs @var{nspaces} spaces. It is handy to align the
1478 text produced by @code{ui_out_text} with the rest of the table or
1479 list.
1480 @end deftypefun
1481
1482 @deftypefun void ui_out_message (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{verbosity}, const char *@var{format}, ...)
1483 This function produces a formatted message, provided that the current
1484 verbosity level is at least as large as given by @var{verbosity}. The
1485 current verbosity level is specified by the user with the @samp{set
1486 verbositylevel} command.@footnote{As of this writing (April 2001),
1487 setting verbosity level is not yet implemented, and is always returned
1488 as zero. So calling @code{ui_out_message} with a @var{verbosity}
1489 argument more than zero will cause the message to never be printed.}
1490 @end deftypefun
1491
1492 @deftypefun void ui_out_wrap_hint (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{indent})
1493 This function gives the console output filter (a paging filter) a hint
1494 of where to break lines which are too long. Ignored for all other
1495 output consumers. @var{indent}, if non-@code{NULL}, is the string to
1496 be printed to indent the wrapped text on the next line; it must remain
1497 accessible until the next call to @code{ui_out_wrap_hint}, or until an
1498 explicit newline is produced by one of the other functions. If
1499 @var{indent} is @code{NULL}, the wrapped text will not be indented.
1500 @end deftypefun
1501
1502 @deftypefun void ui_out_flush (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1503 This function flushes whatever output has been accumulated so far, if
1504 the UI buffers output.
1505 @end deftypefun
1506
1507
1508 @subsection Examples of Use of @code{ui_out} functions
1509
1510 @cindex using @code{ui_out} functions
1511 @cindex @code{ui_out} functions, usage examples
1512 This section gives some practical examples of using the @code{ui_out}
1513 functions to generalize the old console-oriented code in
1514 @value{GDBN}. The examples all come from functions defined on the
1515 @file{breakpoints.c} file.
1516
1517 This example, from the @code{breakpoint_1} function, shows how to
1518 produce a table.
1519
1520 The original code was:
1521
1522 @smallexample
1523 if (!found_a_breakpoint++)
1524 @{
1525 annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1526
1527 annotate_field (0);
1528 printf_filtered ("Num ");
1529 annotate_field (1);
1530 printf_filtered ("Type ");
1531 annotate_field (2);
1532 printf_filtered ("Disp ");
1533 annotate_field (3);
1534 printf_filtered ("Enb ");
1535 if (addressprint)
1536 @{
1537 annotate_field (4);
1538 printf_filtered ("Address ");
1539 @}
1540 annotate_field (5);
1541 printf_filtered ("What\n");
1542
1543 annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1544 @}
1545 @end smallexample
1546
1547 Here's the new version:
1548
1549 @smallexample
1550 nr_printable_breakpoints = @dots{};
1551
1552 if (addressprint)
1553 ui_out_table_begin (ui, 6, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1554 else
1555 ui_out_table_begin (ui, 5, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1556
1557 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1558 annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1559 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1560 annotate_field (0);
1561 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "number", "Num"); /* 1 */
1562 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1563 annotate_field (1);
1564 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 14, ui_left, "type", "Type"); /* 2 */
1565 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1566 annotate_field (2);
1567 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 4, ui_left, "disp", "Disp"); /* 3 */
1568 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1569 annotate_field (3);
1570 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "enabled", "Enb"); /* 4 */
1571 if (addressprint)
1572 @{
1573 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1574 annotate_field (4);
1575 if (gdbarch_addr_bit (current_gdbarch) <= 32)
1576 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 10, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1577 else
1578 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 18, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1579 @}
1580 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1581 annotate_field (5);
1582 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 40, ui_noalign, "what", "What"); /* 6 */
1583 ui_out_table_body (uiout);
1584 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1585 annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1586 @end smallexample
1587
1588 This example, from the @code{print_one_breakpoint} function, shows how
1589 to produce the actual data for the table whose structure was defined
1590 in the above example. The original code was:
1591
1592 @smallexample
1593 annotate_record ();
1594 annotate_field (0);
1595 printf_filtered ("%-3d ", b->number);
1596 annotate_field (1);
1597 if ((int)b->type > (sizeof(bptypes)/sizeof(bptypes[0]))
1598 || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1599 internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1600 (int)b->type);
1601 printf_filtered ("%-14s ", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1602 annotate_field (2);
1603 printf_filtered ("%-4s ", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1604 annotate_field (3);
1605 printf_filtered ("%-3c ", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1606 @dots{}
1607 @end smallexample
1608
1609 This is the new version:
1610
1611 @smallexample
1612 annotate_record ();
1613 ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "bkpt");
1614 annotate_field (0);
1615 ui_out_field_int (uiout, "number", b->number);
1616 annotate_field (1);
1617 if (((int) b->type > (sizeof (bptypes) / sizeof (bptypes[0])))
1618 || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1619 internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1620 (int) b->type);
1621 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "type", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1622 annotate_field (2);
1623 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "disp", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1624 annotate_field (3);
1625 ui_out_field_fmt (uiout, "enabled", "%c", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1626 @dots{}
1627 @end smallexample
1628
1629 This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to
1630 produce a complicated output field using the @code{print_expression}
1631 functions which requires a stream to be passed. It also shows how to
1632 automate stream destruction with cleanups. The original code was:
1633
1634 @smallexample
1635 annotate_field (5);
1636 print_expression (b->exp, gdb_stdout);
1637 @end smallexample
1638
1639 The new version is:
1640
1641 @smallexample
1642 struct ui_stream *stb = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1643 struct cleanup *old_chain = make_cleanup_ui_out_stream_delete (stb);
1644 ...
1645 annotate_field (5);
1646 print_expression (b->exp, stb->stream);
1647 ui_out_field_stream (uiout, "what", local_stream);
1648 @end smallexample
1649
1650 This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to use
1651 @code{ui_out_text} and @code{ui_out_field_string}. The original code
1652 was:
1653
1654 @smallexample
1655 annotate_field (5);
1656 if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1657 printf_filtered ("<any library> ");
1658 else
1659 printf_filtered ("library \"%s\" ", b->dll_pathname);
1660 @end smallexample
1661
1662 It became:
1663
1664 @smallexample
1665 annotate_field (5);
1666 if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1667 @{
1668 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", "<any library>");
1669 ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1670 @}
1671 else
1672 @{
1673 ui_out_text (uiout, "library \"");
1674 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->dll_pathname);
1675 ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1676 @}
1677 @end smallexample
1678
1679 The following example from @code{print_one_breakpoint} shows how to
1680 use @code{ui_out_field_int} and @code{ui_out_spaces}. The original
1681 code was:
1682
1683 @smallexample
1684 annotate_field (5);
1685 if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1686 printf_filtered ("process %d ", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1687 @end smallexample
1688
1689 It became:
1690
1691 @smallexample
1692 annotate_field (5);
1693 if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1694 @{
1695 ui_out_text (uiout, "process ");
1696 ui_out_field_int (uiout, "what", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1697 ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1698 @}
1699 @end smallexample
1700
1701 Here's an example of using @code{ui_out_field_string}. The original
1702 code was:
1703
1704 @smallexample
1705 annotate_field (5);
1706 if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1707 printf_filtered ("program \"%s\" ", b->exec_pathname);
1708 @end smallexample
1709
1710 It became:
1711
1712 @smallexample
1713 annotate_field (5);
1714 if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1715 @{
1716 ui_out_text (uiout, "program \"");
1717 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->exec_pathname);
1718 ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1719 @}
1720 @end smallexample
1721
1722 Finally, here's an example of printing an address. The original code:
1723
1724 @smallexample
1725 annotate_field (4);
1726 printf_filtered ("%s ",
1727 hex_string_custom ((unsigned long) b->address, 8));
1728 @end smallexample
1729
1730 It became:
1731
1732 @smallexample
1733 annotate_field (4);
1734 ui_out_field_core_addr (uiout, "Address", b->address);
1735 @end smallexample
1736
1737
1738 @section Console Printing
1739
1740 @section TUI
1741
1742 @node libgdb
1743
1744 @chapter libgdb
1745
1746 @section libgdb 1.0
1747 @cindex @code{libgdb}
1748 @code{libgdb} 1.0 was an abortive project of years ago. The theory was
1749 to provide an API to @value{GDBN}'s functionality.
1750
1751 @section libgdb 2.0
1752 @cindex @code{libgdb}
1753 @code{libgdb} 2.0 is an ongoing effort to update @value{GDBN} so that is
1754 better able to support graphical and other environments.
1755
1756 Since @code{libgdb} development is on-going, its architecture is still
1757 evolving. The following components have so far been identified:
1758
1759 @itemize @bullet
1760 @item
1761 Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}.
1762 @item
1763 Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1764 @item
1765 Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1766 @item
1767 Library - @file{gdb.h}
1768 @end itemize
1769
1770 The model that ties these components together is described below.
1771
1772 @section The @code{libgdb} Model
1773
1774 A client of @code{libgdb} interacts with the library in two ways.
1775
1776 @itemize @bullet
1777 @item
1778 As an observer (using @file{gdb-events}) receiving notifications from
1779 @code{libgdb} of any internal state changes (break point changes, run
1780 state, etc).
1781 @item
1782 As a client querying @code{libgdb} (using the @file{ui-out} builder) to
1783 obtain various status values from @value{GDBN}.
1784 @end itemize
1785
1786 Since @code{libgdb} could have multiple clients (e.g., a GUI supporting
1787 the existing @value{GDBN} CLI), those clients must co-operate when
1788 controlling @code{libgdb}. In particular, a client must ensure that
1789 @code{libgdb} is idle (i.e. no other client is using @code{libgdb})
1790 before responding to a @file{gdb-event} by making a query.
1791
1792 @section CLI support
1793
1794 At present @value{GDBN}'s CLI is very much entangled in with the core of
1795 @code{libgdb}. Consequently, a client wishing to include the CLI in
1796 their interface needs to carefully co-ordinate its own and the CLI's
1797 requirements.
1798
1799 It is suggested that the client set @code{libgdb} up to be bi-modal
1800 (alternate between CLI and client query modes). The notes below sketch
1801 out the theory:
1802
1803 @itemize @bullet
1804 @item
1805 The client registers itself as an observer of @code{libgdb}.
1806 @item
1807 The client create and install @code{cli-out} builder using its own
1808 versions of the @code{ui-file} @code{gdb_stderr}, @code{gdb_stdtarg} and
1809 @code{gdb_stdout} streams.
1810 @item
1811 The client creates a separate custom @code{ui-out} builder that is only
1812 used while making direct queries to @code{libgdb}.
1813 @end itemize
1814
1815 When the client receives input intended for the CLI, it simply passes it
1816 along. Since the @code{cli-out} builder is installed by default, all
1817 the CLI output in response to that command is routed (pronounced rooted)
1818 through to the client controlled @code{gdb_stdout} et.@: al.@: streams.
1819 At the same time, the client is kept abreast of internal changes by
1820 virtue of being a @code{libgdb} observer.
1821
1822 The only restriction on the client is that it must wait until
1823 @code{libgdb} becomes idle before initiating any queries (using the
1824 client's custom builder).
1825
1826 @section @code{libgdb} components
1827
1828 @subheading Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}
1829 @file{gdb-events} provides the client with a very raw mechanism that can
1830 be used to implement an observer. At present it only allows for one
1831 observer and that observer must, internally, handle the need to delay
1832 the processing of any event notifications until after @code{libgdb} has
1833 finished the current command.
1834
1835 @subheading Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1836 @file{ui-out} provides the infrastructure necessary for a client to
1837 create a builder. That builder is then passed down to @code{libgdb}
1838 when doing any queries.
1839
1840 @subheading Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1841 @c There could be an entire section on the event-loop
1842 @file{event-loop}, currently non-re-entrant, provides a simple event
1843 loop. A client would need to either plug its self into this loop or,
1844 implement a new event-loop that GDB would use.
1845
1846 The event-loop will eventually be made re-entrant. This is so that
1847 @value{GDBN} can better handle the problem of some commands blocking
1848 instead of returning.
1849
1850 @subheading Library - @file{gdb.h}
1851 @file{libgdb} is the most obvious component of this system. It provides
1852 the query interface. Each function is parameterized by a @code{ui-out}
1853 builder. The result of the query is constructed using that builder
1854 before the query function returns.
1855
1856 @node Symbol Handling
1857
1858 @chapter Symbol Handling
1859
1860 Symbols are a key part of @value{GDBN}'s operation. Symbols include variables,
1861 functions, and types.
1862
1863 @section Symbol Reading
1864
1865 @cindex symbol reading
1866 @cindex reading of symbols
1867 @cindex symbol files
1868 @value{GDBN} reads symbols from @dfn{symbol files}. The usual symbol
1869 file is the file containing the program which @value{GDBN} is
1870 debugging. @value{GDBN} can be directed to use a different file for
1871 symbols (with the @samp{symbol-file} command), and it can also read
1872 more symbols via the @samp{add-file} and @samp{load} commands, or while
1873 reading symbols from shared libraries.
1874
1875 @findex find_sym_fns
1876 Symbol files are initially opened by code in @file{symfile.c} using
1877 the BFD library (@pxref{Support Libraries}). BFD identifies the type
1878 of the file by examining its header. @code{find_sym_fns} then uses
1879 this identification to locate a set of symbol-reading functions.
1880
1881 @findex add_symtab_fns
1882 @cindex @code{sym_fns} structure
1883 @cindex adding a symbol-reading module
1884 Symbol-reading modules identify themselves to @value{GDBN} by calling
1885 @code{add_symtab_fns} during their module initialization. The argument
1886 to @code{add_symtab_fns} is a @code{struct sym_fns} which contains the
1887 name (or name prefix) of the symbol format, the length of the prefix,
1888 and pointers to four functions. These functions are called at various
1889 times to process symbol files whose identification matches the specified
1890 prefix.
1891
1892 The functions supplied by each module are:
1893
1894 @table @code
1895 @item @var{xyz}_symfile_init(struct sym_fns *sf)
1896
1897 @cindex secondary symbol file
1898 Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when we are about to read a new
1899 symbol file. This function should clean up any internal state (possibly
1900 resulting from half-read previous files, for example) and prepare to
1901 read a new symbol file. Note that the symbol file which we are reading
1902 might be a new ``main'' symbol file, or might be a secondary symbol file
1903 whose symbols are being added to the existing symbol table.
1904
1905 The argument to @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init} is a newly allocated
1906 @code{struct sym_fns} whose @code{bfd} field contains the BFD for the
1907 new symbol file being read. Its @code{private} field has been zeroed,
1908 and can be modified as desired. Typically, a struct of private
1909 information will be @code{malloc}'d, and a pointer to it will be placed
1910 in the @code{private} field.
1911
1912 There is no result from @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, but it can call
1913 @code{error} if it detects an unavoidable problem.
1914
1915 @item @var{xyz}_new_init()
1916
1917 Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when discarding existing symbols.
1918 This function needs only handle the symbol-reading module's internal
1919 state; the symbol table data structures visible to the rest of
1920 @value{GDBN} will be discarded by @code{symbol_file_add}. It has no
1921 arguments and no result. It may be called after
1922 @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, if a new symbol table is being read, or
1923 may be called alone if all symbols are simply being discarded.
1924
1925 @item @var{xyz}_symfile_read(struct sym_fns *sf, CORE_ADDR addr, int mainline)
1926
1927 Called from @code{symbol_file_add} to actually read the symbols from a
1928 symbol-file into a set of psymtabs or symtabs.
1929
1930 @code{sf} points to the @code{struct sym_fns} originally passed to
1931 @code{@var{xyz}_sym_init} for possible initialization. @code{addr} is
1932 the offset between the file's specified start address and its true
1933 address in memory. @code{mainline} is 1 if this is the main symbol
1934 table being read, and 0 if a secondary symbol file (e.g., shared library
1935 or dynamically loaded file) is being read.@refill
1936 @end table
1937
1938 In addition, if a symbol-reading module creates psymtabs when
1939 @var{xyz}_symfile_read is called, these psymtabs will contain a pointer
1940 to a function @code{@var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab}, which can be called
1941 from any point in the @value{GDBN} symbol-handling code.
1942
1943 @table @code
1944 @item @var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab (struct partial_symtab *pst)
1945
1946 Called from @code{psymtab_to_symtab} (or the @code{PSYMTAB_TO_SYMTAB} macro) if
1947 the psymtab has not already been read in and had its @code{pst->symtab}
1948 pointer set. The argument is the psymtab to be fleshed-out into a
1949 symtab. Upon return, @code{pst->readin} should have been set to 1, and
1950 @code{pst->symtab} should contain a pointer to the new corresponding symtab, or
1951 zero if there were no symbols in that part of the symbol file.
1952 @end table
1953
1954 @section Partial Symbol Tables
1955
1956 @value{GDBN} has three types of symbol tables:
1957
1958 @itemize @bullet
1959 @cindex full symbol table
1960 @cindex symtabs
1961 @item
1962 Full symbol tables (@dfn{symtabs}). These contain the main
1963 information about symbols and addresses.
1964
1965 @cindex psymtabs
1966 @item
1967 Partial symbol tables (@dfn{psymtabs}). These contain enough
1968 information to know when to read the corresponding part of the full
1969 symbol table.
1970
1971 @cindex minimal symbol table
1972 @cindex minsymtabs
1973 @item
1974 Minimal symbol tables (@dfn{msymtabs}). These contain information
1975 gleaned from non-debugging symbols.
1976 @end itemize
1977
1978 @cindex partial symbol table
1979 This section describes partial symbol tables.
1980
1981 A psymtab is constructed by doing a very quick pass over an executable
1982 file's debugging information. Small amounts of information are
1983 extracted---enough to identify which parts of the symbol table will
1984 need to be re-read and fully digested later, when the user needs the
1985 information. The speed of this pass causes @value{GDBN} to start up very
1986 quickly. Later, as the detailed rereading occurs, it occurs in small
1987 pieces, at various times, and the delay therefrom is mostly invisible to
1988 the user.
1989 @c (@xref{Symbol Reading}.)
1990
1991 The symbols that show up in a file's psymtab should be, roughly, those
1992 visible to the debugger's user when the program is not running code from
1993 that file. These include external symbols and types, static symbols and
1994 types, and @code{enum} values declared at file scope.
1995
1996 The psymtab also contains the range of instruction addresses that the
1997 full symbol table would represent.
1998
1999 @cindex finding a symbol
2000 @cindex symbol lookup
2001 The idea is that there are only two ways for the user (or much of the
2002 code in the debugger) to reference a symbol:
2003
2004 @itemize @bullet
2005 @findex find_pc_function
2006 @findex find_pc_line
2007 @item
2008 By its address (e.g., execution stops at some address which is inside a
2009 function in this file). The address will be noticed to be in the
2010 range of this psymtab, and the full symtab will be read in.
2011 @code{find_pc_function}, @code{find_pc_line}, and other
2012 @code{find_pc_@dots{}} functions handle this.
2013
2014 @cindex lookup_symbol
2015 @item
2016 By its name
2017 (e.g., the user asks to print a variable, or set a breakpoint on a
2018 function). Global names and file-scope names will be found in the
2019 psymtab, which will cause the symtab to be pulled in. Local names will
2020 have to be qualified by a global name, or a file-scope name, in which
2021 case we will have already read in the symtab as we evaluated the
2022 qualifier. Or, a local symbol can be referenced when we are ``in'' a
2023 local scope, in which case the first case applies. @code{lookup_symbol}
2024 does most of the work here.
2025 @end itemize
2026
2027 The only reason that psymtabs exist is to cause a symtab to be read in
2028 at the right moment. Any symbol that can be elided from a psymtab,
2029 while still causing that to happen, should not appear in it. Since
2030 psymtabs don't have the idea of scope, you can't put local symbols in
2031 them anyway. Psymtabs don't have the idea of the type of a symbol,
2032 either, so types need not appear, unless they will be referenced by
2033 name.
2034
2035 It is a bug for @value{GDBN} to behave one way when only a psymtab has
2036 been read, and another way if the corresponding symtab has been read
2037 in. Such bugs are typically caused by a psymtab that does not contain
2038 all the visible symbols, or which has the wrong instruction address
2039 ranges.
2040
2041 The psymtab for a particular section of a symbol file (objfile) could be
2042 thrown away after the symtab has been read in. The symtab should always
2043 be searched before the psymtab, so the psymtab will never be used (in a
2044 bug-free environment). Currently, psymtabs are allocated on an obstack,
2045 and all the psymbols themselves are allocated in a pair of large arrays
2046 on an obstack, so there is little to be gained by trying to free them
2047 unless you want to do a lot more work.
2048
2049 @section Types
2050
2051 @unnumberedsubsec Fundamental Types (e.g., @code{FT_VOID}, @code{FT_BOOLEAN}).
2052
2053 @cindex fundamental types
2054 These are the fundamental types that @value{GDBN} uses internally. Fundamental
2055 types from the various debugging formats (stabs, ELF, etc) are mapped
2056 into one of these. They are basically a union of all fundamental types
2057 that @value{GDBN} knows about for all the languages that @value{GDBN}
2058 knows about.
2059
2060 @unnumberedsubsec Type Codes (e.g., @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}, @code{TYPE_CODE_ARRAY}).
2061
2062 @cindex type codes
2063 Each time @value{GDBN} builds an internal type, it marks it with one
2064 of these types. The type may be a fundamental type, such as
2065 @code{TYPE_CODE_INT}, or a derived type, such as @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}
2066 which is a pointer to another type. Typically, several @code{FT_*}
2067 types map to one @code{TYPE_CODE_*} type, and are distinguished by
2068 other members of the type struct, such as whether the type is signed
2069 or unsigned, and how many bits it uses.
2070
2071 @unnumberedsubsec Builtin Types (e.g., @code{builtin_type_void}, @code{builtin_type_char}).
2072
2073 These are instances of type structs that roughly correspond to
2074 fundamental types and are created as global types for @value{GDBN} to
2075 use for various ugly historical reasons. We eventually want to
2076 eliminate these. Note for example that @code{builtin_type_int}
2077 initialized in @file{gdbtypes.c} is basically the same as a
2078 @code{TYPE_CODE_INT} type that is initialized in @file{c-lang.c} for
2079 an @code{FT_INTEGER} fundamental type. The difference is that the
2080 @code{builtin_type} is not associated with any particular objfile, and
2081 only one instance exists, while @file{c-lang.c} builds as many
2082 @code{TYPE_CODE_INT} types as needed, with each one associated with
2083 some particular objfile.
2084
2085 @section Object File Formats
2086 @cindex object file formats
2087
2088 @subsection a.out
2089
2090 @cindex @code{a.out} format
2091 The @code{a.out} format is the original file format for Unix. It
2092 consists of three sections: @code{text}, @code{data}, and @code{bss},
2093 which are for program code, initialized data, and uninitialized data,
2094 respectively.
2095
2096 The @code{a.out} format is so simple that it doesn't have any reserved
2097 place for debugging information. (Hey, the original Unix hackers used
2098 @samp{adb}, which is a machine-language debugger!) The only debugging
2099 format for @code{a.out} is stabs, which is encoded as a set of normal
2100 symbols with distinctive attributes.
2101
2102 The basic @code{a.out} reader is in @file{dbxread.c}.
2103
2104 @subsection COFF
2105
2106 @cindex COFF format
2107 The COFF format was introduced with System V Release 3 (SVR3) Unix.
2108 COFF files may have multiple sections, each prefixed by a header. The
2109 number of sections is limited.
2110
2111 The COFF specification includes support for debugging. Although this
2112 was a step forward, the debugging information was woefully limited. For
2113 instance, it was not possible to represent code that came from an
2114 included file.
2115
2116 The COFF reader is in @file{coffread.c}.
2117
2118 @subsection ECOFF
2119
2120 @cindex ECOFF format
2121 ECOFF is an extended COFF originally introduced for Mips and Alpha
2122 workstations.
2123
2124 The basic ECOFF reader is in @file{mipsread.c}.
2125
2126 @subsection XCOFF
2127
2128 @cindex XCOFF format
2129 The IBM RS/6000 running AIX uses an object file format called XCOFF.
2130 The COFF sections, symbols, and line numbers are used, but debugging
2131 symbols are @code{dbx}-style stabs whose strings are located in the
2132 @code{.debug} section (rather than the string table). For more
2133 information, see @ref{Top,,,stabs,The Stabs Debugging Format}.
2134
2135 The shared library scheme has a clean interface for figuring out what
2136 shared libraries are in use, but the catch is that everything which
2137 refers to addresses (symbol tables and breakpoints at least) needs to be
2138 relocated for both shared libraries and the main executable. At least
2139 using the standard mechanism this can only be done once the program has
2140 been run (or the core file has been read).
2141
2142 @subsection PE
2143
2144 @cindex PE-COFF format
2145 Windows 95 and NT use the PE (@dfn{Portable Executable}) format for their
2146 executables. PE is basically COFF with additional headers.
2147
2148 While BFD includes special PE support, @value{GDBN} needs only the basic
2149 COFF reader.
2150
2151 @subsection ELF
2152
2153 @cindex ELF format
2154 The ELF format came with System V Release 4 (SVR4) Unix. ELF is similar
2155 to COFF in being organized into a number of sections, but it removes
2156 many of COFF's limitations.
2157
2158 The basic ELF reader is in @file{elfread.c}.
2159
2160 @subsection SOM
2161
2162 @cindex SOM format
2163 SOM is HP's object file and debug format (not to be confused with IBM's
2164 SOM, which is a cross-language ABI).
2165
2166 The SOM reader is in @file{somread.c}.
2167
2168 @section Debugging File Formats
2169
2170 This section describes characteristics of debugging information that
2171 are independent of the object file format.
2172
2173 @subsection stabs
2174
2175 @cindex stabs debugging info
2176 @code{stabs} started out as special symbols within the @code{a.out}
2177 format. Since then, it has been encapsulated into other file
2178 formats, such as COFF and ELF.
2179
2180 While @file{dbxread.c} does some of the basic stab processing,
2181 including for encapsulated versions, @file{stabsread.c} does
2182 the real work.
2183
2184 @subsection COFF
2185
2186 @cindex COFF debugging info
2187 The basic COFF definition includes debugging information. The level
2188 of support is minimal and non-extensible, and is not often used.
2189
2190 @subsection Mips debug (Third Eye)
2191
2192 @cindex ECOFF debugging info
2193 ECOFF includes a definition of a special debug format.
2194
2195 The file @file{mdebugread.c} implements reading for this format.
2196
2197 @subsection DWARF 2
2198
2199 @cindex DWARF 2 debugging info
2200 DWARF 2 is an improved but incompatible version of DWARF 1.
2201
2202 The DWARF 2 reader is in @file{dwarf2read.c}.
2203
2204 @subsection SOM
2205
2206 @cindex SOM debugging info
2207 Like COFF, the SOM definition includes debugging information.
2208
2209 @section Adding a New Symbol Reader to @value{GDBN}
2210
2211 @cindex adding debugging info reader
2212 If you are using an existing object file format (@code{a.out}, COFF, ELF, etc),
2213 there is probably little to be done.
2214
2215 If you need to add a new object file format, you must first add it to
2216 BFD. This is beyond the scope of this document.
2217
2218 You must then arrange for the BFD code to provide access to the
2219 debugging symbols. Generally @value{GDBN} will have to call swapping routines
2220 from BFD and a few other BFD internal routines to locate the debugging
2221 information. As much as possible, @value{GDBN} should not depend on the BFD
2222 internal data structures.
2223
2224 For some targets (e.g., COFF), there is a special transfer vector used
2225 to call swapping routines, since the external data structures on various
2226 platforms have different sizes and layouts. Specialized routines that
2227 will only ever be implemented by one object file format may be called
2228 directly. This interface should be described in a file
2229 @file{bfd/lib@var{xyz}.h}, which is included by @value{GDBN}.
2230
2231 @section Memory Management for Symbol Files
2232
2233 Most memory associated with a loaded symbol file is stored on
2234 its @code{objfile_obstack}. This includes symbols, types,
2235 namespace data, and other information produced by the symbol readers.
2236
2237 Because this data lives on the objfile's obstack, it is automatically
2238 released when the objfile is unloaded or reloaded. Therefore one
2239 objfile must not reference symbol or type data from another objfile;
2240 they could be unloaded at different times.
2241
2242 User convenience variables, et cetera, have associated types. Normally
2243 these types live in the associated objfile. However, when the objfile
2244 is unloaded, those types are deep copied to global memory, so that
2245 the values of the user variables and history items are not lost.
2246
2247
2248 @node Language Support
2249
2250 @chapter Language Support
2251
2252 @cindex language support
2253 @value{GDBN}'s language support is mainly driven by the symbol reader,
2254 although it is possible for the user to set the source language
2255 manually.
2256
2257 @value{GDBN} chooses the source language by looking at the extension
2258 of the file recorded in the debug info; @file{.c} means C, @file{.f}
2259 means Fortran, etc. It may also use a special-purpose language
2260 identifier if the debug format supports it, like with DWARF.
2261
2262 @section Adding a Source Language to @value{GDBN}
2263
2264 @cindex adding source language
2265 To add other languages to @value{GDBN}'s expression parser, follow the
2266 following steps:
2267
2268 @table @emph
2269 @item Create the expression parser.
2270
2271 @cindex expression parser
2272 This should reside in a file @file{@var{lang}-exp.y}. Routines for
2273 building parsed expressions into a @code{union exp_element} list are in
2274 @file{parse.c}.
2275
2276 @cindex language parser
2277 Since we can't depend upon everyone having Bison, and YACC produces
2278 parsers that define a bunch of global names, the following lines
2279 @strong{must} be included at the top of the YACC parser, to prevent the
2280 various parsers from defining the same global names:
2281
2282 @smallexample
2283 #define yyparse @var{lang}_parse
2284 #define yylex @var{lang}_lex
2285 #define yyerror @var{lang}_error
2286 #define yylval @var{lang}_lval
2287 #define yychar @var{lang}_char
2288 #define yydebug @var{lang}_debug
2289 #define yypact @var{lang}_pact
2290 #define yyr1 @var{lang}_r1
2291 #define yyr2 @var{lang}_r2
2292 #define yydef @var{lang}_def
2293 #define yychk @var{lang}_chk
2294 #define yypgo @var{lang}_pgo
2295 #define yyact @var{lang}_act
2296 #define yyexca @var{lang}_exca
2297 #define yyerrflag @var{lang}_errflag
2298 #define yynerrs @var{lang}_nerrs
2299 @end smallexample
2300
2301 At the bottom of your parser, define a @code{struct language_defn} and
2302 initialize it with the right values for your language. Define an
2303 @code{initialize_@var{lang}} routine and have it call
2304 @samp{add_language(@var{lang}_language_defn)} to tell the rest of @value{GDBN}
2305 that your language exists. You'll need some other supporting variables
2306 and functions, which will be used via pointers from your
2307 @code{@var{lang}_language_defn}. See the declaration of @code{struct
2308 language_defn} in @file{language.h}, and the other @file{*-exp.y} files,
2309 for more information.
2310
2311 @item Add any evaluation routines, if necessary
2312
2313 @cindex expression evaluation routines
2314 @findex evaluate_subexp
2315 @findex prefixify_subexp
2316 @findex length_of_subexp
2317 If you need new opcodes (that represent the operations of the language),
2318 add them to the enumerated type in @file{expression.h}. Add support
2319 code for these operations in the @code{evaluate_subexp} function
2320 defined in the file @file{eval.c}. Add cases
2321 for new opcodes in two functions from @file{parse.c}:
2322 @code{prefixify_subexp} and @code{length_of_subexp}. These compute
2323 the number of @code{exp_element}s that a given operation takes up.
2324
2325 @item Update some existing code
2326
2327 Add an enumerated identifier for your language to the enumerated type
2328 @code{enum language} in @file{defs.h}.
2329
2330 Update the routines in @file{language.c} so your language is included.
2331 These routines include type predicates and such, which (in some cases)
2332 are language dependent. If your language does not appear in the switch
2333 statement, an error is reported.
2334
2335 @vindex current_language
2336 Also included in @file{language.c} is the code that updates the variable
2337 @code{current_language}, and the routines that translate the
2338 @code{language_@var{lang}} enumerated identifier into a printable
2339 string.
2340
2341 @findex _initialize_language
2342 Update the function @code{_initialize_language} to include your
2343 language. This function picks the default language upon startup, so is
2344 dependent upon which languages that @value{GDBN} is built for.
2345
2346 @findex allocate_symtab
2347 Update @code{allocate_symtab} in @file{symfile.c} and/or symbol-reading
2348 code so that the language of each symtab (source file) is set properly.
2349 This is used to determine the language to use at each stack frame level.
2350 Currently, the language is set based upon the extension of the source
2351 file. If the language can be better inferred from the symbol
2352 information, please set the language of the symtab in the symbol-reading
2353 code.
2354
2355 @findex print_subexp
2356 @findex op_print_tab
2357 Add helper code to @code{print_subexp} (in @file{expprint.c}) to handle any new
2358 expression opcodes you have added to @file{expression.h}. Also, add the
2359 printed representations of your operators to @code{op_print_tab}.
2360
2361 @item Add a place of call
2362
2363 @findex parse_exp_1
2364 Add a call to @code{@var{lang}_parse()} and @code{@var{lang}_error} in
2365 @code{parse_exp_1} (defined in @file{parse.c}).
2366
2367 @item Use macros to trim code
2368
2369 @cindex trimming language-dependent code
2370 The user has the option of building @value{GDBN} for some or all of the
2371 languages. If the user decides to build @value{GDBN} for the language
2372 @var{lang}, then every file dependent on @file{language.h} will have the
2373 macro @code{_LANG_@var{lang}} defined in it. Use @code{#ifdef}s to
2374 leave out large routines that the user won't need if he or she is not
2375 using your language.
2376
2377 Note that you do not need to do this in your YACC parser, since if @value{GDBN}
2378 is not build for @var{lang}, then @file{@var{lang}-exp.tab.o} (the
2379 compiled form of your parser) is not linked into @value{GDBN} at all.
2380
2381 See the file @file{configure.in} for how @value{GDBN} is configured
2382 for different languages.
2383
2384 @item Edit @file{Makefile.in}
2385
2386 Add dependencies in @file{Makefile.in}. Make sure you update the macro
2387 variables such as @code{HFILES} and @code{OBJS}, otherwise your code may
2388 not get linked in, or, worse yet, it may not get @code{tar}red into the
2389 distribution!
2390 @end table
2391
2392
2393 @node Host Definition
2394
2395 @chapter Host Definition
2396
2397 With the advent of Autoconf, it's rarely necessary to have host
2398 definition machinery anymore. The following information is provided,
2399 mainly, as an historical reference.
2400
2401 @section Adding a New Host
2402
2403 @cindex adding a new host
2404 @cindex host, adding
2405 @value{GDBN}'s host configuration support normally happens via Autoconf.
2406 New host-specific definitions should not be needed. Older hosts
2407 @value{GDBN} still use the host-specific definitions and files listed
2408 below, but these mostly exist for historical reasons, and will
2409 eventually disappear.
2410
2411 @table @file
2412 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
2413 This file once contained both host and native configuration information
2414 (@pxref{Native Debugging}) for the machine @var{xyz}. The host
2415 configuration information is now handed by Autoconf.
2416
2417 Host configuration information included a definition of
2418 @code{XM_FILE=xm-@var{xyz}.h} and possibly definitions for @code{CC},
2419 @code{SYSV_DEFINE}, @code{XM_CFLAGS}, @code{XM_ADD_FILES},
2420 @code{XM_CLIBS}, @code{XM_CDEPS}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
2421
2422 New host only configurations do not need this file.
2423
2424 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/xm-@var{xyz}.h
2425 This file once contained definitions and includes required when hosting
2426 gdb on machine @var{xyz}. Those definitions and includes are now
2427 handled by Autoconf.
2428
2429 New host and native configurations do not need this file.
2430
2431 @emph{Maintainer's note: Some hosts continue to use the @file{xm-xyz.h}
2432 file to define the macros @var{HOST_FLOAT_FORMAT},
2433 @var{HOST_DOUBLE_FORMAT} and @var{HOST_LONG_DOUBLE_FORMAT}. That code
2434 also needs to be replaced with either an Autoconf or run-time test.}
2435
2436 @end table
2437
2438 @subheading Generic Host Support Files
2439
2440 @cindex generic host support
2441 There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
2442 various systems. These can be customized in various ways by macros
2443 defined in your @file{xm-@var{xyz}.h} file. If these routines work for
2444 the @var{xyz} host, you can just include the generic file's name (with
2445 @samp{.o}, not @samp{.c}) in @code{XDEPFILES}.
2446
2447 Otherwise, if your machine needs custom support routines, you will need
2448 to write routines that perform the same functions as the generic file.
2449 Put them into @code{@var{xyz}-xdep.c}, and put @code{@var{xyz}-xdep.o}
2450 into @code{XDEPFILES}.
2451
2452 @table @file
2453 @cindex remote debugging support
2454 @cindex serial line support
2455 @item ser-unix.c
2456 This contains serial line support for Unix systems. This is always
2457 included, via the makefile variable @code{SER_HARDWIRE}; override this
2458 variable in the @file{.mh} file to avoid it.
2459
2460 @item ser-go32.c
2461 This contains serial line support for 32-bit programs running under DOS,
2462 using the DJGPP (a.k.a.@: GO32) execution environment.
2463
2464 @cindex TCP remote support
2465 @item ser-tcp.c
2466 This contains generic TCP support using sockets.
2467 @end table
2468
2469 @section Host Conditionals
2470
2471 When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
2472 defined or left undefined, to control compilation based on the
2473 attributes of the host system. These macros and their meanings (or if
2474 the meaning is not documented here, then one of the source files where
2475 they are used is indicated) are:
2476
2477 @ftable @code
2478 @item @value{GDBN}INIT_FILENAME
2479 The default name of @value{GDBN}'s initialization file (normally
2480 @file{.gdbinit}).
2481
2482 @item NO_STD_REGS
2483 This macro is deprecated.
2484
2485 @item SIGWINCH_HANDLER
2486 If your host defines @code{SIGWINCH}, you can define this to be the name
2487 of a function to be called if @code{SIGWINCH} is received.
2488
2489 @item SIGWINCH_HANDLER_BODY
2490 Define this to expand into code that will define the function named by
2491 the expansion of @code{SIGWINCH_HANDLER}.
2492
2493 @item ALIGN_STACK_ON_STARTUP
2494 @cindex stack alignment
2495 Define this if your system is of a sort that will crash in
2496 @code{tgetent} if the stack happens not to be longword-aligned when
2497 @code{main} is called. This is a rare situation, but is known to occur
2498 on several different types of systems.
2499
2500 @item CRLF_SOURCE_FILES
2501 @cindex DOS text files
2502 Define this if host files use @code{\r\n} rather than @code{\n} as a
2503 line terminator. This will cause source file listings to omit @code{\r}
2504 characters when printing and it will allow @code{\r\n} line endings of files
2505 which are ``sourced'' by gdb. It must be possible to open files in binary
2506 mode using @code{O_BINARY} or, for fopen, @code{"rb"}.
2507
2508 @item DEFAULT_PROMPT
2509 @cindex prompt
2510 The default value of the prompt string (normally @code{"(gdb) "}).
2511
2512 @item DEV_TTY
2513 @cindex terminal device
2514 The name of the generic TTY device, defaults to @code{"/dev/tty"}.
2515
2516 @item FOPEN_RB
2517 Define this if binary files are opened the same way as text files.
2518
2519 @item HAVE_MMAP
2520 @findex mmap
2521 In some cases, use the system call @code{mmap} for reading symbol
2522 tables. For some machines this allows for sharing and quick updates.
2523
2524 @item HAVE_TERMIO
2525 Define this if the host system has @code{termio.h}.
2526
2527 @item INT_MAX
2528 @itemx INT_MIN
2529 @itemx LONG_MAX
2530 @itemx UINT_MAX
2531 @itemx ULONG_MAX
2532 Values for host-side constants.
2533
2534 @item ISATTY
2535 Substitute for isatty, if not available.
2536
2537 @item LONGEST
2538 This is the longest integer type available on the host. If not defined,
2539 it will default to @code{long long} or @code{long}, depending on
2540 @code{CC_HAS_LONG_LONG}.
2541
2542 @item CC_HAS_LONG_LONG
2543 @cindex @code{long long} data type
2544 Define this if the host C compiler supports @code{long long}. This is set
2545 by the @code{configure} script.
2546
2547 @item PRINTF_HAS_LONG_LONG
2548 Define this if the host can handle printing of long long integers via
2549 the printf format conversion specifier @code{ll}. This is set by the
2550 @code{configure} script.
2551
2552 @item HAVE_LONG_DOUBLE
2553 Define this if the host C compiler supports @code{long double}. This is
2554 set by the @code{configure} script.
2555
2556 @item PRINTF_HAS_LONG_DOUBLE
2557 Define this if the host can handle printing of long double float-point
2558 numbers via the printf format conversion specifier @code{Lg}. This is
2559 set by the @code{configure} script.
2560
2561 @item SCANF_HAS_LONG_DOUBLE
2562 Define this if the host can handle the parsing of long double
2563 float-point numbers via the scanf format conversion specifier
2564 @code{Lg}. This is set by the @code{configure} script.
2565
2566 @item LSEEK_NOT_LINEAR
2567 Define this if @code{lseek (n)} does not necessarily move to byte number
2568 @code{n} in the file. This is only used when reading source files. It
2569 is normally faster to define @code{CRLF_SOURCE_FILES} when possible.
2570
2571 @item L_SET
2572 This macro is used as the argument to @code{lseek} (or, most commonly,
2573 @code{bfd_seek}). FIXME, should be replaced by SEEK_SET instead,
2574 which is the POSIX equivalent.
2575
2576 @item NORETURN
2577 If defined, this should be one or more tokens, such as @code{volatile},
2578 that can be used in both the declaration and definition of functions to
2579 indicate that they never return. The default is already set correctly
2580 if compiling with GCC. This will almost never need to be defined.
2581
2582 @item ATTR_NORETURN
2583 If defined, this should be one or more tokens, such as
2584 @code{__attribute__ ((noreturn))}, that can be used in the declarations
2585 of functions to indicate that they never return. The default is already
2586 set correctly if compiling with GCC. This will almost never need to be
2587 defined.
2588
2589 @item SEEK_CUR
2590 @itemx SEEK_SET
2591 Define these to appropriate value for the system @code{lseek}, if not already
2592 defined.
2593
2594 @item STOP_SIGNAL
2595 This is the signal for stopping @value{GDBN}. Defaults to
2596 @code{SIGTSTP}. (Only redefined for the Convex.)
2597
2598 @item USG
2599 Means that System V (prior to SVR4) include files are in use. (FIXME:
2600 This symbol is abused in @file{infrun.c}, @file{regex.c}, and
2601 @file{utils.c} for other things, at the moment.)
2602
2603 @item lint
2604 Define this to help placate @code{lint} in some situations.
2605
2606 @item volatile
2607 Define this to override the defaults of @code{__volatile__} or
2608 @code{/**/}.
2609 @end ftable
2610
2611
2612 @node Target Architecture Definition
2613
2614 @chapter Target Architecture Definition
2615
2616 @cindex target architecture definition
2617 @value{GDBN}'s target architecture defines what sort of
2618 machine-language programs @value{GDBN} can work with, and how it works
2619 with them.
2620
2621 The target architecture object is implemented as the C structure
2622 @code{struct gdbarch *}. The structure, and its methods, are generated
2623 using the Bourne shell script @file{gdbarch.sh}.
2624
2625 @menu
2626 * OS ABI Variant Handling::
2627 * Initialize New Architecture::
2628 * Registers and Memory::
2629 * Pointers and Addresses::
2630 * Address Classes::
2631 * Raw and Virtual Registers::
2632 * Register and Memory Data::
2633 * Frame Interpretation::
2634 * Inferior Call Setup::
2635 * Compiler Characteristics::
2636 * Target Conditionals::
2637 * Adding a New Target::
2638 @end menu
2639
2640 @node OS ABI Variant Handling
2641 @section Operating System ABI Variant Handling
2642 @cindex OS ABI variants
2643
2644 @value{GDBN} provides a mechanism for handling variations in OS
2645 ABIs. An OS ABI variant may have influence over any number of
2646 variables in the target architecture definition. There are two major
2647 components in the OS ABI mechanism: sniffers and handlers.
2648
2649 A @dfn{sniffer} examines a file matching a BFD architecture/flavour pair
2650 (the architecture may be wildcarded) in an attempt to determine the
2651 OS ABI of that file. Sniffers with a wildcarded architecture are considered
2652 to be @dfn{generic}, while sniffers for a specific architecture are
2653 considered to be @dfn{specific}. A match from a specific sniffer
2654 overrides a match from a generic sniffer. Multiple sniffers for an
2655 architecture/flavour may exist, in order to differentiate between two
2656 different operating systems which use the same basic file format. The
2657 OS ABI framework provides a generic sniffer for ELF-format files which
2658 examines the @code{EI_OSABI} field of the ELF header, as well as note
2659 sections known to be used by several operating systems.
2660
2661 @cindex fine-tuning @code{gdbarch} structure
2662 A @dfn{handler} is used to fine-tune the @code{gdbarch} structure for the
2663 selected OS ABI. There may be only one handler for a given OS ABI
2664 for each BFD architecture.
2665
2666 The following OS ABI variants are defined in @file{defs.h}:
2667
2668 @table @code
2669
2670 @findex GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2671 @item GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2672 Used for struct gdbarch_info if ABI is still uninitialized.
2673
2674 @findex GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2675 @item GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2676 The ABI of the inferior is unknown. The default @code{gdbarch}
2677 settings for the architecture will be used.
2678
2679 @findex GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2680 @item GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2681 UNIX System V Release 4.
2682
2683 @findex GDB_OSABI_HURD
2684 @item GDB_OSABI_HURD
2685 GNU using the Hurd kernel.
2686
2687 @findex GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2688 @item GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2689 Sun Solaris.
2690
2691 @findex GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2692 @item GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2693 OSF/1, including Digital UNIX and Compaq Tru64 UNIX.
2694
2695 @findex GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2696 @item GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2697 GNU using the Linux kernel.
2698
2699 @findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2700 @item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2701 FreeBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2702
2703 @findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2704 @item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2705 FreeBSD using the ELF executable format.
2706
2707 @findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2708 @item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2709 NetBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2710
2711 @findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2712 @item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2713 NetBSD using the ELF executable format.
2714
2715 @findex GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2716 @item GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2717 OpenBSD using the ELF executable format.
2718
2719 @findex GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2720 @item GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2721 Windows CE.
2722
2723 @findex GDB_OSABI_GO32
2724 @item GDB_OSABI_GO32
2725 DJGPP.
2726
2727 @findex GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2728 @item GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2729 Irix.
2730
2731 @findex GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2732 @item GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2733 Interix (Posix layer for MS-Windows systems).
2734
2735 @findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2736 @item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2737 HP/UX using the ELF executable format.
2738
2739 @findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2740 @item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2741 HP/UX using the SOM executable format.
2742
2743 @findex GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2744 @item GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2745 QNX Neutrino.
2746
2747 @findex GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2748 @item GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2749 Cygwin.
2750
2751 @findex GDB_OSABI_AIX
2752 @item GDB_OSABI_AIX
2753 AIX.
2754
2755 @end table
2756
2757 Here are the functions that make up the OS ABI framework:
2758
2759 @deftypefun const char *gdbarch_osabi_name (enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2760 Return the name of the OS ABI corresponding to @var{osabi}.
2761 @end deftypefun
2762
2763 @deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, unsigned long @var{machine}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi}, void (*@var{init_osabi})(struct gdbarch_info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}))
2764 Register the OS ABI handler specified by @var{init_osabi} for the
2765 architecture, machine type and OS ABI specified by @var{arch},
2766 @var{machine} and @var{osabi}. In most cases, a value of zero for the
2767 machine type, which implies the architecture's default machine type,
2768 will suffice.
2769 @end deftypefun
2770
2771 @deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi_sniffer (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, enum bfd_flavour @var{flavour}, enum gdb_osabi (*@var{sniffer})(bfd *@var{abfd}))
2772 Register the OS ABI file sniffer specified by @var{sniffer} for the
2773 BFD architecture/flavour pair specified by @var{arch} and @var{flavour}.
2774 If @var{arch} is @code{bfd_arch_unknown}, the sniffer is considered to
2775 be generic, and is allowed to examine @var{flavour}-flavoured files for
2776 any architecture.
2777 @end deftypefun
2778
2779 @deftypefun enum gdb_osabi gdbarch_lookup_osabi (bfd *@var{abfd})
2780 Examine the file described by @var{abfd} to determine its OS ABI.
2781 The value @code{GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN} is returned if the OS ABI cannot
2782 be determined.
2783 @end deftypefun
2784
2785 @deftypefun void gdbarch_init_osabi (struct gdbarch info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2786 Invoke the OS ABI handler corresponding to @var{osabi} to fine-tune the
2787 @code{gdbarch} structure specified by @var{gdbarch}. If a handler
2788 corresponding to @var{osabi} has not been registered for @var{gdbarch}'s
2789 architecture, a warning will be issued and the debugging session will continue
2790 with the defaults already established for @var{gdbarch}.
2791 @end deftypefun
2792
2793 @deftypefun void generic_elf_osabi_sniff_abi_tag_sections (bfd *@var{abfd}, asection *@var{sect}, void *@var{obj})
2794 Helper routine for ELF file sniffers. Examine the file described by
2795 @var{abfd} and look at ABI tag note sections to determine the OS ABI
2796 from the note. This function should be called via
2797 @code{bfd_map_over_sections}.
2798 @end deftypefun
2799
2800 @node Initialize New Architecture
2801 @section Initializing a New Architecture
2802
2803 Each @code{gdbarch} is associated with a single @sc{bfd} architecture,
2804 via a @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}} constant. The @code{gdbarch} is
2805 registered by a call to @code{register_gdbarch_init}, usually from
2806 the file's @code{_initialize_@var{filename}} routine, which will
2807 be automatically called during @value{GDBN} startup. The arguments
2808 are a @sc{bfd} architecture constant and an initialization function.
2809
2810 The initialization function has this type:
2811
2812 @smallexample
2813 static struct gdbarch *
2814 @var{arch}_gdbarch_init (struct gdbarch_info @var{info},
2815 struct gdbarch_list *@var{arches})
2816 @end smallexample
2817
2818 The @var{info} argument contains parameters used to select the correct
2819 architecture, and @var{arches} is a list of architectures which
2820 have already been created with the same @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}}
2821 value.
2822
2823 The initialization function should first make sure that @var{info}
2824 is acceptable, and return @code{NULL} if it is not. Then, it should
2825 search through @var{arches} for an exact match to @var{info}, and
2826 return one if found. Lastly, if no exact match was found, it should
2827 create a new architecture based on @var{info} and return it.
2828
2829 Only information in @var{info} should be used to choose the new
2830 architecture. Historically, @var{info} could be sparse, and
2831 defaults would be collected from the first element on @var{arches}.
2832 However, @value{GDBN} now fills in @var{info} more thoroughly,
2833 so new @code{gdbarch} initialization functions should not take
2834 defaults from @var{arches}.
2835
2836 @node Registers and Memory
2837 @section Registers and Memory
2838
2839 @value{GDBN}'s model of the target machine is rather simple.
2840 @value{GDBN} assumes the machine includes a bank of registers and a
2841 block of memory. Each register may have a different size.
2842
2843 @value{GDBN} does not have a magical way to match up with the
2844 compiler's idea of which registers are which; however, it is critical
2845 that they do match up accurately. The only way to make this work is
2846 to get accurate information about the order that the compiler uses,
2847 and to reflect that in the @code{gdbarch_register_name} and related functions.
2848
2849 @value{GDBN} can handle big-endian, little-endian, and bi-endian architectures.
2850
2851 @node Pointers and Addresses
2852 @section Pointers Are Not Always Addresses
2853 @cindex pointer representation
2854 @cindex address representation
2855 @cindex word-addressed machines
2856 @cindex separate data and code address spaces
2857 @cindex spaces, separate data and code address
2858 @cindex address spaces, separate data and code
2859 @cindex code pointers, word-addressed
2860 @cindex converting between pointers and addresses
2861 @cindex D10V addresses
2862
2863 On almost all 32-bit architectures, the representation of a pointer is
2864 indistinguishable from the representation of some fixed-length number
2865 whose value is the byte address of the object pointed to. On such
2866 machines, the words ``pointer'' and ``address'' can be used interchangeably.
2867 However, architectures with smaller word sizes are often cramped for
2868 address space, so they may choose a pointer representation that breaks this
2869 identity, and allows a larger code address space.
2870
2871 For example, the Renesas D10V is a 16-bit VLIW processor whose
2872 instructions are 32 bits long@footnote{Some D10V instructions are
2873 actually pairs of 16-bit sub-instructions. However, since you can't
2874 jump into the middle of such a pair, code addresses can only refer to
2875 full 32 bit instructions, which is what matters in this explanation.}.
2876 If the D10V used ordinary byte addresses to refer to code locations,
2877 then the processor would only be able to address 64kb of instructions.
2878 However, since instructions must be aligned on four-byte boundaries, the
2879 low two bits of any valid instruction's byte address are always
2880 zero---byte addresses waste two bits. So instead of byte addresses,
2881 the D10V uses word addresses---byte addresses shifted right two bits---to
2882 refer to code. Thus, the D10V can use 16-bit words to address 256kb of
2883 code space.
2884
2885 However, this means that code pointers and data pointers have different
2886 forms on the D10V. The 16-bit word @code{0xC020} refers to byte address
2887 @code{0xC020} when used as a data address, but refers to byte address
2888 @code{0x30080} when used as a code address.
2889
2890 (The D10V also uses separate code and data address spaces, which also
2891 affects the correspondence between pointers and addresses, but we're
2892 going to ignore that here; this example is already too long.)
2893
2894 To cope with architectures like this---the D10V is not the only
2895 one!---@value{GDBN} tries to distinguish between @dfn{addresses}, which are
2896 byte numbers, and @dfn{pointers}, which are the target's representation
2897 of an address of a particular type of data. In the example above,
2898 @code{0xC020} is the pointer, which refers to one of the addresses
2899 @code{0xC020} or @code{0x30080}, depending on the type imposed upon it.
2900 @value{GDBN} provides functions for turning a pointer into an address
2901 and vice versa, in the appropriate way for the current architecture.
2902
2903 Unfortunately, since addresses and pointers are identical on almost all
2904 processors, this distinction tends to bit-rot pretty quickly. Thus,
2905 each time you port @value{GDBN} to an architecture which does
2906 distinguish between pointers and addresses, you'll probably need to
2907 clean up some architecture-independent code.
2908
2909 Here are functions which convert between pointers and addresses:
2910
2911 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR extract_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type})
2912 Treat the bytes at @var{buf} as a pointer or reference of type
2913 @var{type}, and return the address it represents, in a manner
2914 appropriate for the current architecture. This yields an address
2915 @value{GDBN} can use to read target memory, disassemble, etc. Note that
2916 @var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
2917 inferior's.
2918
2919 For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
2920 extracts a little-endian integer of the appropriate length from
2921 @var{buf} and returns it. However, if the current architecture is the
2922 D10V, this function will return a 16-bit integer extracted from
2923 @var{buf}, multiplied by four if @var{type} is a pointer to a function.
2924
2925 If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
2926 will signal an internal error.
2927 @end deftypefun
2928
2929 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR store_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
2930 Store the address @var{addr} in @var{buf}, in the proper format for a
2931 pointer of type @var{type} in the current architecture. Note that
2932 @var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
2933 inferior's.
2934
2935 For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
2936 stores @var{addr} unmodified as a little-endian integer of the
2937 appropriate length in @var{buf}. However, if the current architecture
2938 is the D10V, this function divides @var{addr} by four if @var{type} is
2939 a pointer to a function, and then stores it in @var{buf}.
2940
2941 If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
2942 will signal an internal error.
2943 @end deftypefun
2944
2945 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_as_address (struct value *@var{val})
2946 Assuming that @var{val} is a pointer, return the address it represents,
2947 as appropriate for the current architecture.
2948
2949 This function actually works on integral values, as well as pointers.
2950 For pointers, it performs architecture-specific conversions as
2951 described above for @code{extract_typed_address}.
2952 @end deftypefun
2953
2954 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_from_pointer (struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
2955 Create and return a value representing a pointer of type @var{type} to
2956 the address @var{addr}, as appropriate for the current architecture.
2957 This function performs architecture-specific conversions as described
2958 above for @code{store_typed_address}.
2959 @end deftypefun
2960
2961 Here are two functions which architectures can define to indicate the
2962 relationship between pointers and addresses. These have default
2963 definitions, appropriate for architectures on which all pointers are
2964 simple unsigned byte addresses.
2965
2966 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR gdbarch_pointer_to_address (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf})
2967 Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
2968 appropriate format for the current architecture. Return the byte
2969 address the pointer refers to.
2970
2971 This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
2972 C@t{++} reference type.
2973 @end deftypefun
2974
2975 @deftypefun void gdbarch_address_to_pointer (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
2976 Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
2977 @var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
2978
2979 This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
2980 C@t{++} reference type.
2981 @end deftypefun
2982
2983 @node Address Classes
2984 @section Address Classes
2985 @cindex address classes
2986 @cindex DW_AT_byte_size
2987 @cindex DW_AT_address_class
2988
2989 Sometimes information about different kinds of addresses is available
2990 via the debug information. For example, some programming environments
2991 define addresses of several different sizes. If the debug information
2992 distinguishes these kinds of address classes through either the size
2993 info (e.g, @code{DW_AT_byte_size} in @w{DWARF 2}) or through an explicit
2994 address class attribute (e.g, @code{DW_AT_address_class} in @w{DWARF 2}), the
2995 following macros should be defined in order to disambiguate these
2996 types within @value{GDBN} as well as provide the added information to
2997 a @value{GDBN} user when printing type expressions.
2998
2999 @deftypefun int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, int @var{byte_size}, int @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
3000 Returns the type flags needed to construct a pointer type whose size
3001 is @var{byte_size} and whose address class is @var{dwarf2_addr_class}.
3002 This function is normally called from within a symbol reader. See
3003 @file{dwarf2read.c}.
3004 @end deftypefun
3005
3006 @deftypefun char *gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, int @var{type_flags})
3007 Given the type flags representing an address class qualifier, return
3008 its name.
3009 @end deftypefun
3010 @deftypefun int gdbarch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, int @var{name}, int *var{type_flags_ptr})
3011 Given an address qualifier name, set the @code{int} referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the type flags
3012 for that address class qualifier.
3013 @end deftypefun
3014
3015 Since the need for address classes is rather rare, none of
3016 the address class functions are defined by default. Predicate
3017 functions are provided to detect when they are defined.
3018
3019 Consider a hypothetical architecture in which addresses are normally
3020 32-bits wide, but 16-bit addresses are also supported. Furthermore,
3021 suppose that the @w{DWARF 2} information for this architecture simply
3022 uses a @code{DW_AT_byte_size} value of 2 to indicate the use of one
3023 of these "short" pointers. The following functions could be defined
3024 to implement the address class functions:
3025
3026 @smallexample
3027 somearch_address_class_type_flags (int byte_size,
3028 int dwarf2_addr_class)
3029 @{
3030 if (byte_size == 2)
3031 return TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
3032 else
3033 return 0;
3034 @}
3035
3036 static char *
3037 somearch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (int type_flags)
3038 @{
3039 if (type_flags & TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1)
3040 return "short";
3041 else
3042 return NULL;
3043 @}
3044
3045 int
3046 somearch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (char *name,
3047 int *type_flags_ptr)
3048 @{
3049 if (strcmp (name, "short") == 0)
3050 @{
3051 *type_flags_ptr = TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
3052 return 1;
3053 @}
3054 else
3055 return 0;
3056 @}
3057 @end smallexample
3058
3059 The qualifier @code{@@short} is used in @value{GDBN}'s type expressions
3060 to indicate the presence of one of these "short" pointers. E.g, if
3061 the debug information indicates that @code{short_ptr_var} is one of these
3062 short pointers, @value{GDBN} might show the following behavior:
3063
3064 @smallexample
3065 (gdb) ptype short_ptr_var
3066 type = int * @@short
3067 @end smallexample
3068
3069
3070 @node Raw and Virtual Registers
3071 @section Raw and Virtual Register Representations
3072 @cindex raw register representation
3073 @cindex virtual register representation
3074 @cindex representations, raw and virtual registers
3075
3076 @emph{Maintainer note: This section is pretty much obsolete. The
3077 functionality described here has largely been replaced by
3078 pseudo-registers and the mechanisms described in @ref{Target
3079 Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data
3080 Representations}. See also @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/gdb/bugs/,
3081 Bug Tracking Database} and
3082 @uref{http://sources.redhat.com/gdb/current/ari/, ARI Index} for more
3083 up-to-date information.}
3084
3085 Some architectures use one representation for a value when it lives in a
3086 register, but use a different representation when it lives in memory.
3087 In @value{GDBN}'s terminology, the @dfn{raw} representation is the one used in
3088 the target registers, and the @dfn{virtual} representation is the one
3089 used in memory, and within @value{GDBN} @code{struct value} objects.
3090
3091 @emph{Maintainer note: Notice that the same mechanism is being used to
3092 both convert a register to a @code{struct value} and alternative
3093 register forms.}
3094
3095 For almost all data types on almost all architectures, the virtual and
3096 raw representations are identical, and no special handling is needed.
3097 However, they do occasionally differ. For example:
3098
3099 @itemize @bullet
3100 @item
3101 The x86 architecture supports an 80-bit @code{long double} type. However, when
3102 we store those values in memory, they occupy twelve bytes: the
3103 floating-point number occupies the first ten, and the final two bytes
3104 are unused. This keeps the values aligned on four-byte boundaries,
3105 allowing more efficient access. Thus, the x86 80-bit floating-point
3106 type is the raw representation, and the twelve-byte loosely-packed
3107 arrangement is the virtual representation.
3108
3109 @item
3110 Some 64-bit MIPS targets present 32-bit registers to @value{GDBN} as 64-bit
3111 registers, with garbage in their upper bits. @value{GDBN} ignores the top 32
3112 bits. Thus, the 64-bit form, with garbage in the upper 32 bits, is the
3113 raw representation, and the trimmed 32-bit representation is the
3114 virtual representation.
3115 @end itemize
3116
3117 In general, the raw representation is determined by the architecture, or
3118 @value{GDBN}'s interface to the architecture, while the virtual representation
3119 can be chosen for @value{GDBN}'s convenience. @value{GDBN}'s register file,
3120 @code{registers}, holds the register contents in raw format, and the
3121 @value{GDBN} remote protocol transmits register values in raw format.
3122
3123 Your architecture may define the following macros to request
3124 conversions between the raw and virtual format:
3125
3126 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int REGISTER_CONVERTIBLE (int @var{reg})
3127 Return non-zero if register number @var{reg}'s value needs different raw
3128 and virtual formats.
3129
3130 You should not use @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL} for a register
3131 unless this macro returns a non-zero value for that register.
3132 @end deftypefn
3133
3134 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int DEPRECATED_REGISTER_RAW_SIZE (int @var{reg})
3135 The size of register number @var{reg}'s raw value. This is the number
3136 of bytes the register will occupy in @code{registers}, or in a @value{GDBN}
3137 remote protocol packet.
3138 @end deftypefn
3139
3140 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_SIZE (int @var{reg})
3141 The size of register number @var{reg}'s value, in its virtual format.
3142 This is the size a @code{struct value}'s buffer will have, holding that
3143 register's value.
3144 @end deftypefn
3145
3146 @deftypefn {Target Macro} struct type *DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (int @var{reg})
3147 This is the type of the virtual representation of register number
3148 @var{reg}. Note that there is no need for a macro giving a type for the
3149 register's raw form; once the register's value has been obtained, @value{GDBN}
3150 always uses the virtual form.
3151 @end deftypefn
3152
3153 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL (int @var{reg}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3154 Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to @var{type}, which
3155 should always be @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (@var{reg})}. The buffer
3156 at @var{from} holds the register's value in raw format; the macro should
3157 convert the value to virtual format, and place it at @var{to}.
3158
3159 Note that @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL} and
3160 @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW} take their @var{reg} and @var{type}
3161 arguments in different orders.
3162
3163 You should only use @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL} with registers
3164 for which the @code{REGISTER_CONVERTIBLE} macro returns a non-zero
3165 value.
3166 @end deftypefn
3167
3168 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW (struct type *@var{type}, int @var{reg}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3169 Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to @var{type}, which
3170 should always be @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (@var{reg})}. The buffer
3171 at @var{from} holds the register's value in raw format; the macro should
3172 convert the value to virtual format, and place it at @var{to}.
3173
3174 Note that REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL and REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW take
3175 their @var{reg} and @var{type} arguments in different orders.
3176 @end deftypefn
3177
3178
3179 @node Register and Memory Data
3180 @section Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations
3181 @cindex register representation
3182 @cindex memory representation
3183 @cindex representations, register and memory
3184 @cindex register data formats, converting
3185 @cindex @code{struct value}, converting register contents to
3186
3187 @emph{Maintainer's note: The way GDB manipulates registers is undergoing
3188 significant change. Many of the macros and functions referred to in this
3189 section are likely to be subject to further revision. See
3190 @uref{http://sources.redhat.com/gdb/current/ari/, A.R. Index} and
3191 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/gdb/bugs, Bug Tracking Database} for
3192 further information. cagney/2002-05-06.}
3193
3194 Some architectures can represent a data object in a register using a
3195 form that is different to the objects more normal memory representation.
3196 For example:
3197
3198 @itemize @bullet
3199
3200 @item
3201 The Alpha architecture can represent 32 bit integer values in
3202 floating-point registers.
3203
3204 @item
3205 The x86 architecture supports 80-bit floating-point registers. The
3206 @code{long double} data type occupies 96 bits in memory but only 80 bits
3207 when stored in a register.
3208
3209 @end itemize
3210
3211 In general, the register representation of a data type is determined by
3212 the architecture, or @value{GDBN}'s interface to the architecture, while
3213 the memory representation is determined by the Application Binary
3214 Interface.
3215
3216 For almost all data types on almost all architectures, the two
3217 representations are identical, and no special handling is needed.
3218 However, they do occasionally differ. Your architecture may define the
3219 following macros to request conversions between the register and memory
3220 representations of a data type:
3221
3222 @deftypefun int gdbarch_convert_register_p (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{reg})
3223 Return non-zero if the representation of a data value stored in this
3224 register may be different to the representation of that same data value
3225 when stored in memory.
3226
3227 When non-zero, the macros @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and
3228 @code{value_to_register} are used to perform any necessary conversion.
3229 @end deftypefun
3230
3231 @deftypefun void gdbarch_register_to_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{reg}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3232 Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to a data object of type
3233 @var{type}. The buffer at @var{from} holds the register's value in raw
3234 format; the converted value should be placed in the buffer at @var{to}.
3235
3236 Note that @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and @code{gdbarch_value_to_register}
3237 take their @var{reg} and @var{type} arguments in different orders.
3238
3239 You should only use @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} with registers for which
3240 the @code{gdbarch_convert_register_p} function returns a non-zero value.
3241 @end deftypefun
3242
3243 @deftypefun void gdbarch_value_to_register (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, int @var{reg}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3244 Convert a data value of type @var{type} to register number @var{reg}'
3245 raw format.
3246
3247 Note that @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and @code{gdbarch_value_to_register}
3248 take their @var{reg} and @var{type} arguments in different orders.
3249
3250 You should only use @code{gdbarch_value_to_register} with registers for which
3251 the @code{gdbarch_convert_register_p} function returns a non-zero value.
3252 @end deftypefun
3253
3254 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_TYPE (int @var{regnum}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf})
3255 See @file{mips-tdep.c}. It does not do what you want.
3256 @end deftypefn
3257
3258 @node Frame Interpretation
3259 @section Frame Interpretation
3260
3261 @node Inferior Call Setup
3262 @section Inferior Call Setup
3263
3264 @node Compiler Characteristics
3265 @section Compiler Characteristics
3266
3267 @node Target Conditionals
3268 @section Target Conditionals
3269
3270 This section describes the macros and functions that you can use to define the
3271 target machine.
3272
3273 @table @code
3274
3275 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (@var{gdbarch}, @var{addr})
3276 @findex gdbarch_addr_bits_remove
3277 If a raw machine instruction address includes any bits that are not
3278 really part of the address, then this function is used to zero those bits in
3279 @var{addr}. This is only used for addresses of instructions, and even then not
3280 in all contexts.
3281
3282 For example, the two low-order bits of the PC on the Hewlett-Packard PA
3283 2.0 architecture contain the privilege level of the corresponding
3284 instruction. Since instructions must always be aligned on four-byte
3285 boundaries, the processor masks out these bits to generate the actual
3286 address of the instruction. @code{gdbarch_addr_bits_remove} would then for
3287 example look like that:
3288 @smallexample
3289 arch_addr_bits_remove (CORE_ADDR addr)
3290 @{
3291 return (addr &= ~0x3);
3292 @}
3293 @end smallexample
3294
3295 @item int address_class_name_to_type_flags (@var{gdbarch}, @var{name}, @var{type_flags_ptr})
3296 @findex address_class_name_to_type_flags
3297 If @var{name} is a valid address class qualifier name, set the @code{int}
3298 referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the mask representing the qualifier
3299 and return 1. If @var{name} is not a valid address class qualifier name,
3300 return 0.
3301
3302 The value for @var{type_flags_ptr} should be one of
3303 @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1}, @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or
3304 possibly some combination of these values or'd together.
3305 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
3306
3307 @item int address_class_name_to_type_flags_p (@var{gdbarch})
3308 @findex address_class_name_to_type_flags_p
3309 Predicate which indicates whether @code{address_class_name_to_type_flags}
3310 has been defined.
3311
3312 @item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags (@var{gdbarch}, @var{byte_size}, @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
3313 @findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags
3314 Given a pointers byte size (as described by the debug information) and
3315 the possible @code{DW_AT_address_class} value, return the type flags
3316 used by @value{GDBN} to represent this address class. The value
3317 returned should be one of @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1},
3318 @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or possibly some combination of these
3319 values or'd together.
3320 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
3321
3322 @item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p (@var{gdbarch})
3323 @findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p
3324 Predicate which indicates whether @code{gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p} has
3325 been defined.
3326
3327 @item const char *gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type_flags})
3328 @findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name
3329 Return the name of the address class qualifier associated with the type
3330 flags given by @var{type_flags}.
3331
3332 @item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name_p (@var{gdbarch})
3333 @findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name_p
3334 Predicate which indicates whether @code{gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name} has been defined.
3335 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
3336
3337 @item void gdbarch_address_to_pointer (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf}, @var{addr})
3338 @findex gdbarch_address_to_pointer
3339 Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
3340 @var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
3341 This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
3342 C@t{++} reference type.
3343 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
3344
3345 @item int gdbarch_believe_pcc_promotion (@var{gdbarch})
3346 @findex gdbarch_believe_pcc_promotion
3347 Used to notify if the compiler promotes a @code{short} or @code{char}
3348 parameter to an @code{int}, but still reports the parameter as its
3349 original type, rather than the promoted type.
3350
3351 @item BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
3352 @findex BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
3353 Define this if the numbering of bits in the targets does @strong{not} match the
3354 endianness of the target byte order. A value of 1 means that the bits
3355 are numbered in a big-endian bit order, 0 means little-endian.
3356
3357 @item BREAKPOINT
3358 @findex BREAKPOINT
3359 This is the character array initializer for the bit pattern to put into
3360 memory where a breakpoint is set. Although it's common to use a trap
3361 instruction for a breakpoint, it's not required; for instance, the bit
3362 pattern could be an invalid instruction. The breakpoint must be no
3363 longer than the shortest instruction of the architecture.
3364
3365 @code{BREAKPOINT} has been deprecated in favor of
3366 @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc}.
3367
3368 @item BIG_BREAKPOINT
3369 @itemx LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
3370 @findex LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
3371 @findex BIG_BREAKPOINT
3372 Similar to BREAKPOINT, but used for bi-endian targets.
3373
3374 @code{BIG_BREAKPOINT} and @code{LITTLE_BREAKPOINT} have been deprecated in
3375 favor of @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc}.
3376
3377 @item const gdb_byte *gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pcptr}, @var{lenptr})
3378 @findex gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc
3379 @anchor{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} Use the program counter to determine the
3380 contents and size of a breakpoint instruction. It returns a pointer to
3381 a string of bytes that encode a breakpoint instruction, stores the
3382 length of the string to @code{*@var{lenptr}}, and adjusts the program
3383 counter (if necessary) to point to the actual memory location where the
3384 breakpoint should be inserted.
3385
3386 Although it is common to use a trap instruction for a breakpoint, it's
3387 not required; for instance, the bit pattern could be an invalid
3388 instruction. The breakpoint must be no longer than the shortest
3389 instruction of the architecture.
3390
3391 Replaces all the other @var{BREAKPOINT} macros.
3392
3393 @item int gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bp_tgt})
3394 @itemx gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bp_tgt})
3395 @findex gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint
3396 @findex gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint
3397 Insert or remove memory based breakpoints. Reasonable defaults
3398 (@code{default_memory_insert_breakpoint} and
3399 @code{default_memory_remove_breakpoint} respectively) have been
3400 provided so that it is not necessary to set these for most
3401 architectures. Architectures which may want to set
3402 @code{gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint} and @code{gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint} will likely have instructions that are oddly sized or are not stored in a
3403 conventional manner.
3404
3405 It may also be desirable (from an efficiency standpoint) to define
3406 custom breakpoint insertion and removal routines if
3407 @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} needs to read the target's memory for some
3408 reason.
3409
3410 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bpaddr})
3411 @findex gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address
3412 @cindex breakpoint address adjusted
3413 Given an address at which a breakpoint is desired, return a breakpoint
3414 address adjusted to account for architectural constraints on
3415 breakpoint placement. This method is not needed by most targets.
3416
3417 The FR-V target (see @file{frv-tdep.c}) requires this method.
3418 The FR-V is a VLIW architecture in which a number of RISC-like
3419 instructions are grouped (packed) together into an aggregate
3420 instruction or instruction bundle. When the processor executes
3421 one of these bundles, the component instructions are executed
3422 in parallel.
3423
3424 In the course of optimization, the compiler may group instructions
3425 from distinct source statements into the same bundle. The line number
3426 information associated with one of the latter statements will likely
3427 refer to some instruction other than the first one in the bundle. So,
3428 if the user attempts to place a breakpoint on one of these latter
3429 statements, @value{GDBN} must be careful to @emph{not} place the break
3430 instruction on any instruction other than the first one in the bundle.
3431 (Remember though that the instructions within a bundle execute
3432 in parallel, so the @emph{first} instruction is the instruction
3433 at the lowest address and has nothing to do with execution order.)
3434
3435 The FR-V's @code{gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address} method will adjust a
3436 breakpoint's address by scanning backwards for the beginning of
3437 the bundle, returning the address of the bundle.
3438
3439 Since the adjustment of a breakpoint may significantly alter a user's
3440 expectation, @value{GDBN} prints a warning when an adjusted breakpoint
3441 is initially set and each time that that breakpoint is hit.
3442
3443 @item int gdbarch_call_dummy_location (@var{gdbarch})
3444 @findex gdbarch_call_dummy_location
3445 See the file @file{inferior.h}.
3446
3447 This method has been replaced by @code{gdbarch_push_dummy_code}
3448 (@pxref{gdbarch_push_dummy_code}).
3449
3450 @item int gdbarch_cannot_fetch_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regum})
3451 @findex gdbarch_cannot_fetch_register
3452 This function should return nonzero if @var{regno} cannot be fetched
3453 from an inferior process. This is only relevant if
3454 @code{FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS} is not defined.
3455
3456 @item int gdbarch_cannot_store_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum})
3457 @findex gdbarch_cannot_store_register
3458 This function should return nonzero if @var{regno} should not be
3459 written to the target. This is often the case for program counters,
3460 status words, and other special registers. This function returns 0 as
3461 default so that @value{GDBN} will assume that all registers may be written.
3462
3463 @item int gdbarch_convert_register_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum}, struct type *@var{type})
3464 @findex gdbarch_convert_register_p
3465 Return non-zero if register @var{regnum} can represent data values in a
3466 non-standard form.
3467 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
3468
3469 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_decr_pc_after_break (@var{gdbarch})
3470 @findex gdbarch_decr_pc_after_break
3471 This function shall return the amount by which to decrement the PC after the
3472 program encounters a breakpoint. This is often the number of bytes in
3473 @code{BREAKPOINT}, though not always. For most targets this value will be 0.
3474
3475 @item DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK (@var{addr})
3476 @findex DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK
3477 If defined, this should evaluate to 1 if @var{addr} is in a shared
3478 library in which breakpoints cannot be set and so should be disabled.
3479
3480 @item void gdbarch_print_float_info (@var{gdbarch}, @var{file}, @var{frame}, @var{args})
3481 @findex gdbarch_print_float_info
3482 If defined, then the @samp{info float} command will print information about
3483 the processor's floating point unit.
3484
3485 @item void gdbarch_print_registers_info (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{regnum}, @var{all})
3486 @findex gdbarch_print_registers_info
3487 If defined, pretty print the value of the register @var{regnum} for the
3488 specified @var{frame}. If the value of @var{regnum} is -1, pretty print
3489 either all registers (@var{all} is non zero) or a select subset of
3490 registers (@var{all} is zero).
3491
3492 The default method prints one register per line, and if @var{all} is
3493 zero omits floating-point registers.
3494
3495 @item int gdbarch_print_vector_info (@var{gdbarch}, @var{file}, @var{frame}, @var{args})
3496 @findex gdbarch_print_vector_info
3497 If defined, then the @samp{info vector} command will call this function
3498 to print information about the processor's vector unit.
3499
3500 By default, the @samp{info vector} command will print all vector
3501 registers (the register's type having the vector attribute).
3502
3503 @item int gdbarch_dwarf_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{dwarf_regnr})
3504 @findex gdbarch_dwarf_reg_to_regnum
3505 Convert DWARF register number @var{dwarf_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum. If
3506 not defined, no conversion will be performed.
3507
3508 @item int gdbarch_dwarf2_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{dwarf2_regnr})
3509 @findex gdbarch_dwarf2_reg_to_regnum
3510 Convert DWARF2 register number @var{dwarf2_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum.
3511 If not defined, no conversion will be performed.
3512
3513 @item int gdbarch_ecoff_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{ecoff_regnr})
3514 @findex gdbarch_ecoff_reg_to_regnum
3515 Convert ECOFF register number @var{ecoff_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum. If
3516 not defined, no conversion will be performed.
3517
3518 @item DEPRECATED_FP_REGNUM
3519 @findex DEPRECATED_FP_REGNUM
3520 If the virtual frame pointer is kept in a register, then define this
3521 macro to be the number (greater than or equal to zero) of that register.
3522
3523 This should only need to be defined if @code{DEPRECATED_TARGET_READ_FP}
3524 is not defined.
3525
3526 @item DEPRECATED_FRAMELESS_FUNCTION_INVOCATION(@var{fi})
3527 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAMELESS_FUNCTION_INVOCATION
3528 Define this to an expression that returns 1 if the function invocation
3529 represented by @var{fi} does not have a stack frame associated with it.
3530 Otherwise return 0.
3531
3532 @item CORE_ADDR frame_align (@var{gdbarch}, @var{address})
3533 @anchor{frame_align}
3534 @findex frame_align
3535 Define this to adjust @var{address} so that it meets the alignment
3536 requirements for the start of a new stack frame. A stack frame's
3537 alignment requirements are typically stronger than a target processors
3538 stack alignment requirements.
3539
3540 This function is used to ensure that, when creating a dummy frame, both
3541 the initial stack pointer and (if needed) the address of the return
3542 value are correctly aligned.
3543
3544 This function always adjusts the address in the direction of stack
3545 growth.
3546
3547 By default, no frame based stack alignment is performed.
3548
3549 @item int gdbarch_frame_red_zone_size (@var{gdbarch})
3550 @findex gdbarch_frame_red_zone_size
3551 The number of bytes, beyond the innermost-stack-address, reserved by the
3552 @sc{abi}. A function is permitted to use this scratch area (instead of
3553 allocating extra stack space).
3554
3555 When performing an inferior function call, to ensure that it does not
3556 modify this area, @value{GDBN} adjusts the innermost-stack-address by
3557 @var{gdbarch_frame_red_zone_size} bytes before pushing parameters onto the
3558 stack.
3559
3560 By default, zero bytes are allocated. The value must be aligned
3561 (@pxref{frame_align}).
3562
3563 The @sc{amd64} (nee x86-64) @sc{abi} documentation refers to the
3564 @emph{red zone} when describing this scratch area.
3565 @cindex red zone
3566
3567 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN(@var{frame})
3568 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN
3569 Given @var{frame}, return a pointer to the calling frame.
3570
3571 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN_VALID(@var{chain}, @var{thisframe})
3572 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN_VALID
3573 Define this to be an expression that returns zero if the given frame is an
3574 outermost frame, with no caller, and nonzero otherwise. Most normal
3575 situations can be handled without defining this macro, including @code{NULL}
3576 chain pointers, dummy frames, and frames whose PC values are inside the
3577 startup file (e.g.@: @file{crt0.o}), inside @code{main}, or inside
3578 @code{_start}.
3579
3580 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS(@var{frame})
3581 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS
3582 See @file{frame.h}. Determines the address of all registers in the
3583 current stack frame storing each in @code{frame->saved_regs}. Space for
3584 @code{frame->saved_regs} shall be allocated by
3585 @code{DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS} using
3586 @code{frame_saved_regs_zalloc}.
3587
3588 @code{FRAME_FIND_SAVED_REGS} is deprecated.
3589
3590 @item int gdbarch_frame_num_args (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame})
3591 @findex gdbarch_frame_num_args
3592 For the frame described by @var{frame} return the number of arguments that
3593 are being passed. If the number of arguments is not known, return
3594 @code{-1}.
3595
3596 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC(@var{frame})
3597 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC
3598 @anchor{DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC} Given @var{frame}, return the pc
3599 saved there. This is the return address.
3600
3601 This method is deprecated. @xref{gdbarch_unwind_pc}.
3602
3603 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_unwind_pc (@var{next_frame})
3604 @findex gdbarch_unwind_pc
3605 @anchor{gdbarch_unwind_pc} Return the instruction address, in
3606 @var{next_frame}'s caller, at which execution will resume after
3607 @var{next_frame} returns. This is commonly referred to as the return address.
3608
3609 The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
3610 is typically no more than:
3611
3612 @smallexample
3613 ULONGEST pc;
3614 pc = frame_unwind_register_unsigned (next_frame, S390_PC_REGNUM);
3615 return gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (gdbarch, pc);
3616 @end smallexample
3617
3618 @noindent
3619 @xref{DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC}, which this method replaces.
3620
3621 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_unwind_sp (@var{gdbarch}, @var{next_frame})
3622 @findex gdbarch_unwind_sp
3623 @anchor{gdbarch_unwind_sp} Return the frame's inner most stack address. This is
3624 commonly referred to as the frame's @dfn{stack pointer}.
3625
3626 The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
3627 is typically no more than:
3628
3629 @smallexample
3630 ULONGEST sp;
3631 sp = frame_unwind_register_unsigned (next_frame, S390_SP_REGNUM);
3632 return gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (gdbarch, sp);
3633 @end smallexample
3634
3635 @noindent
3636 @xref{TARGET_READ_SP}, which this method replaces.
3637
3638 @item FUNCTION_EPILOGUE_SIZE
3639 @findex FUNCTION_EPILOGUE_SIZE
3640 For some COFF targets, the @code{x_sym.x_misc.x_fsize} field of the
3641 function end symbol is 0. For such targets, you must define
3642 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE_SIZE} to expand into the standard size of a
3643 function's epilogue.
3644
3645 @item DEPRECATED_FUNCTION_START_OFFSET
3646 @findex DEPRECATED_FUNCTION_START_OFFSET
3647 An integer, giving the offset in bytes from a function's address (as
3648 used in the values of symbols, function pointers, etc.), and the
3649 function's first genuine instruction.
3650
3651 This is zero on almost all machines: the function's address is usually
3652 the address of its first instruction. However, on the VAX, for
3653 example, each function starts with two bytes containing a bitmask
3654 indicating which registers to save upon entry to the function. The
3655 VAX @code{call} instructions check this value, and save the
3656 appropriate registers automatically. Thus, since the offset from the
3657 function's address to its first instruction is two bytes,
3658 @code{DEPRECATED_FUNCTION_START_OFFSET} would be 2 on the VAX.
3659
3660 @item GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3661 @itemx GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3662 @findex GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3663 @findex GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3664 If defined, these are the names of the symbols that @value{GDBN} will
3665 look for to detect that GCC compiled the file. The default symbols
3666 are @code{gcc_compiled.} and @code{gcc2_compiled.},
3667 respectively. (Currently only defined for the Delta 68.)
3668
3669 @item gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
3670 @findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
3671 For most machines, this is a target-dependent parameter. On the
3672 DECstation and the Iris, this is a native-dependent parameter, since
3673 the header file @file{setjmp.h} is needed to define it.
3674
3675 This macro determines the target PC address that @code{longjmp} will jump to,
3676 assuming that we have just stopped at a @code{longjmp} breakpoint. It takes a
3677 @code{CORE_ADDR *} as argument, and stores the target PC value through this
3678 pointer. It examines the current state of the machine as needed.
3679
3680 @item DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
3681 @findex DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
3682 Shows that we are configured for an IBM RS/6000 system. This
3683 conditional should be eliminated (FIXME) and replaced by
3684 feature-specific macros. It was introduced in a haste and we are
3685 repenting at leisure.
3686
3687 @item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
3688 An x86-based target can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
3689 support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
3690
3691 @item int gdbarch_inner_than (@var{gdbarch}, @var{lhs}, @var{rhs})
3692 @findex gdbarch_inner_than
3693 Returns non-zero if stack address @var{lhs} is inner than (nearer to the
3694 stack top) stack address @var{rhs}. Let the function return
3695 @w{@code{lhs < rhs}} if the target's stack grows downward in memory, or
3696 @w{@code{lhs > rsh}} if the stack grows upward.
3697
3698 @item gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{addr})
3699 @findex gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p
3700 Returns non-zero if the given @var{addr} is in the epilogue of a function.
3701 The epilogue of a function is defined as the part of a function where
3702 the stack frame of the function already has been destroyed up to the
3703 final `return from function call' instruction.
3704
3705 @item int gdbarch_in_solib_return_trampoline (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc}, @var{name})
3706 @findex gdbarch_in_solib_return_trampoline
3707 Define this function to return nonzero if the program is stopped in the
3708 trampoline that returns from a shared library.
3709
3710 @item IN_SOLIB_DYNSYM_RESOLVE_CODE (@var{pc})
3711 @findex IN_SOLIB_DYNSYM_RESOLVE_CODE
3712 Define this to return nonzero if the program is stopped in the
3713 dynamic linker.
3714
3715 @item SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER (@var{pc})
3716 @findex SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER
3717 Define this to evaluate to the (nonzero) address at which execution
3718 should continue to get past the dynamic linker's symbol resolution
3719 function. A zero value indicates that it is not important or necessary
3720 to set a breakpoint to get through the dynamic linker and that single
3721 stepping will suffice.
3722
3723 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_integer_to_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
3724 @findex gdbarch_integer_to_address
3725 @cindex converting integers to addresses
3726 Define this when the architecture needs to handle non-pointer to address
3727 conversions specially. Converts that value to an address according to
3728 the current architectures conventions.
3729
3730 @emph{Pragmatics: When the user copies a well defined expression from
3731 their source code and passes it, as a parameter, to @value{GDBN}'s
3732 @code{print} command, they should get the same value as would have been
3733 computed by the target program. Any deviation from this rule can cause
3734 major confusion and annoyance, and needs to be justified carefully. In
3735 other words, @value{GDBN} doesn't really have the freedom to do these
3736 conversions in clever and useful ways. It has, however, been pointed
3737 out that users aren't complaining about how @value{GDBN} casts integers
3738 to pointers; they are complaining that they can't take an address from a
3739 disassembly listing and give it to @code{x/i}. Adding an architecture
3740 method like @code{gdbarch_integer_to_address} certainly makes it possible for
3741 @value{GDBN} to ``get it right'' in all circumstances.}
3742
3743 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always
3744 Addresses}.
3745
3746 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_pointer_to_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
3747 @findex gdbarch_pointer_to_address
3748 Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
3749 appropriate format for the current architecture. Return the byte
3750 address the pointer refers to.
3751 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
3752
3753 @item void gdbarch_register_to_value(@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{regnum}, @var{type}, @var{fur})
3754 @findex gdbarch_register_to_value
3755 Convert the raw contents of register @var{regnum} into a value of type
3756 @var{type}.
3757 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
3758
3759 @item register_reggroup_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum}, @var{reggroup})
3760 @findex register_reggroup_p
3761 @cindex register groups
3762 Return non-zero if register @var{regnum} is a member of the register
3763 group @var{reggroup}.
3764
3765 By default, registers are grouped as follows:
3766
3767 @table @code
3768 @item float_reggroup
3769 Any register with a valid name and a floating-point type.
3770 @item vector_reggroup
3771 Any register with a valid name and a vector type.
3772 @item general_reggroup
3773 Any register with a valid name and a type other than vector or
3774 floating-point. @samp{float_reggroup}.
3775 @item save_reggroup
3776 @itemx restore_reggroup
3777 @itemx all_reggroup
3778 Any register with a valid name.
3779 @end table
3780
3781 @item DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_SIZE (@var{reg})
3782 @findex DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_SIZE
3783 Return the virtual size of @var{reg}; defaults to the size of the
3784 register's virtual type.
3785 Return the virtual size of @var{reg}.
3786 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3787
3788 @item DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (@var{reg})
3789 @findex REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE
3790 Return the virtual type of @var{reg}.
3791 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3792
3793 @item struct type *register_type (@var{gdbarch}, @var{reg})
3794 @findex register_type
3795 If defined, return the type of register @var{reg}. This function
3796 supersedes @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE}. @xref{Target Architecture
3797 Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3798
3799 @item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL(@var{reg}, @var{type}, @var{from}, @var{to})
3800 @findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL
3801 Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its raw form to its virtual
3802 form.
3803 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3804
3805 @item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW(@var{type}, @var{reg}, @var{from}, @var{to})
3806 @findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW
3807 Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its virtual form to its raw
3808 form.
3809 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3810
3811 @item const struct regset *regset_from_core_section (struct gdbarch * @var{gdbarch}, const char * @var{sect_name}, size_t @var{sect_size})
3812 @findex regset_from_core_section
3813 Return the appropriate register set for a core file section with name
3814 @var{sect_name} and size @var{sect_size}.
3815
3816 @item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P()
3817 @findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P
3818 Define this as 1 if the target does not have a hardware single-step
3819 mechanism. The macro @code{SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP} must also be defined.
3820
3821 @item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP(@var{signal}, @var{insert_breakpoints_p})
3822 @findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP
3823 A function that inserts or removes (depending on
3824 @var{insert_breakpoints_p}) breakpoints at each possible destinations of
3825 the next instruction. See @file{sparc-tdep.c} and @file{rs6000-tdep.c}
3826 for examples.
3827
3828 @item set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing (@var{gdbarch}, @var{set})
3829 @findex set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing
3830 Somebody clever observed that, the more actual addresses you have in the
3831 debug information, the more time the linker has to spend relocating
3832 them. So whenever there's some other way the debugger could find the
3833 address it needs, you should omit it from the debug info, to make
3834 linking faster.
3835
3836 Calling @code{set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing} with a non-zero
3837 argument @var{set} indicates that a particular set of hacks of this sort
3838 are in use, affecting @code{N_SO} and @code{N_FUN} entries in stabs-format
3839 debugging information. @code{N_SO} stabs mark the beginning and ending
3840 addresses of compilation units in the text segment. @code{N_FUN} stabs
3841 mark the starts and ends of functions.
3842
3843 In this case, @value{GDBN} assumes two things:
3844
3845 @itemize @bullet
3846 @item
3847 @code{N_FUN} stabs have an address of zero. Instead of using those
3848 addresses, you should find the address where the function starts by
3849 taking the function name from the stab, and then looking that up in the
3850 minsyms (the linker/assembler symbol table). In other words, the stab
3851 has the name, and the linker/assembler symbol table is the only place
3852 that carries the address.
3853
3854 @item
3855 @code{N_SO} stabs have an address of zero, too. You just look at the
3856 @code{N_FUN} stabs that appear before and after the @code{N_SO} stab, and
3857 guess the starting and ending addresses of the compilation unit from them.
3858 @end itemize
3859
3860 @item int gdbarch_pc_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
3861 @findex gdbarch_pc_regnum
3862 If the program counter is kept in a register, then let this function return
3863 the number (greater than or equal to zero) of that register.
3864
3865 This should only need to be defined if @code{gdbarch_read_pc} and
3866 @code{gdbarch_write_pc} are not defined.
3867
3868 @item int gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type})
3869 @findex gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr
3870 @anchor{gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr} Define this function to return
3871 nonzero if a function argument of type @var{type} is passed by reference
3872 instead of value.
3873
3874 @item PROCESS_LINENUMBER_HOOK
3875 @findex PROCESS_LINENUMBER_HOOK
3876 A hook defined for XCOFF reading.
3877
3878 @item gdbarch_ps_regnum (@var{gdbarch}
3879 @findex gdbarch_ps_regnum
3880 If defined, this function returns the number of the processor status
3881 register.
3882 (This definition is only used in generic code when parsing "$ps".)
3883
3884 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_push_dummy_call (@var{gdbarch}, @var{function}, @var{regcache}, @var{bp_addr}, @var{nargs}, @var{args}, @var{sp}, @var{struct_return}, @var{struct_addr})
3885 @findex gdbarch_push_dummy_call
3886 @findex DEPRECATED_PUSH_ARGUMENTS.
3887 @anchor{gdbarch_push_dummy_call} Define this to push the dummy frame's call to
3888 the inferior function onto the stack. In addition to pushing @var{nargs}, the
3889 code should push @var{struct_addr} (when @var{struct_return} is non-zero), and
3890 the return address (@var{bp_addr}).
3891
3892 @var{function} is a pointer to a @code{struct value}; on architectures that use
3893 function descriptors, this contains the function descriptor value.
3894
3895 Returns the updated top-of-stack pointer.
3896
3897 This method replaces @code{DEPRECATED_PUSH_ARGUMENTS}.
3898
3899 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_push_dummy_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sp}, @var{funaddr}, @var{using_gcc}, @var{args}, @var{nargs}, @var{value_type}, @var{real_pc}, @var{bp_addr}, @var{regcache})
3900 @findex gdbarch_push_dummy_code
3901 @anchor{gdbarch_push_dummy_code} Given a stack based call dummy, push the
3902 instruction sequence (including space for a breakpoint) to which the
3903 called function should return.
3904
3905 Set @var{bp_addr} to the address at which the breakpoint instruction
3906 should be inserted, @var{real_pc} to the resume address when starting
3907 the call sequence, and return the updated inner-most stack address.
3908
3909 By default, the stack is grown sufficient to hold a frame-aligned
3910 (@pxref{frame_align}) breakpoint, @var{bp_addr} is set to the address
3911 reserved for that breakpoint, and @var{real_pc} set to @var{funaddr}.
3912
3913 This method replaces @w{@code{gdbarch_call_dummy_location (@var{gdbarch})}} and
3914 @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_SIZE}.
3915
3916 @item const char *gdbarch_register_name (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnr})
3917 @findex gdbarch_register_name
3918 Return the name of register @var{regnr} as a string. May return @code{NULL}
3919 to indicate that @var{regnr} is not a valid register.
3920
3921 @item SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS (@var{sp})
3922 @findex SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS
3923 @anchor{SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS} Used in @samp{call_function_by_hand} to
3924 notify the target dependent code of the top-of-stack value that will be
3925 passed to the inferior code. This is the value of the @code{SP}
3926 after both the dummy frame and space for parameters/results have been
3927 allocated on the stack. @xref{gdbarch_unwind_dummy_id}.
3928
3929 @item int gdbarch_sdb_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sdb_regnr})
3930 @findex gdbarch_sdb_reg_to_regnum
3931 Use this function to convert sdb register @var{sdb_regnr} into @value{GDBN}
3932 regnum. If not defined, no conversion will be done.
3933
3934 @item enum return_value_convention gdbarch_return_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{valtype}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, void *@var{readbuf}, const void *@var{writebuf})
3935 @findex gdbarch_return_value
3936 @anchor{gdbarch_return_value} Given a function with a return-value of
3937 type @var{rettype}, return which return-value convention that function
3938 would use.
3939
3940 @value{GDBN} currently recognizes two function return-value conventions:
3941 @code{RETURN_VALUE_REGISTER_CONVENTION} where the return value is found
3942 in registers; and @code{RETURN_VALUE_STRUCT_CONVENTION} where the return
3943 value is found in memory and the address of that memory location is
3944 passed in as the function's first parameter.
3945
3946 If the register convention is being used, and @var{writebuf} is
3947 non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return-value in @var{writebuf} into
3948 @var{regcache}.
3949
3950 If the register convention is being used, and @var{readbuf} is
3951 non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return value from @var{regcache} into
3952 @var{readbuf} (@var{regcache} contains a copy of the registers from the
3953 just returned function).
3954
3955 @emph{Maintainer note: This method replaces separate predicate, extract,
3956 store methods. By having only one method, the logic needed to determine
3957 the return-value convention need only be implemented in one place. If
3958 @value{GDBN} were written in an @sc{oo} language, this method would
3959 instead return an object that knew how to perform the register
3960 return-value extract and store.}
3961
3962 @emph{Maintainer note: This method does not take a @var{gcc_p}
3963 parameter, and such a parameter should not be added. If an architecture
3964 that requires per-compiler or per-function information be identified,
3965 then the replacement of @var{rettype} with @code{struct value}
3966 @var{function} should be pursued.}
3967
3968 @emph{Maintainer note: The @var{regcache} parameter limits this methods
3969 to the inner most frame. While replacing @var{regcache} with a
3970 @code{struct frame_info} @var{frame} parameter would remove that
3971 limitation there has yet to be a demonstrated need for such a change.}
3972
3973 @item void gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regcache})
3974 @findex gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint
3975 Advance the inferior's PC past a permanent breakpoint. @value{GDBN} normally
3976 steps over a breakpoint by removing it, stepping one instruction, and
3977 re-inserting the breakpoint. However, permanent breakpoints are
3978 hardwired into the inferior, and can't be removed, so this strategy
3979 doesn't work. Calling @code{gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint} adjusts the
3980 processor's state so that execution will resume just after the breakpoint.
3981 This function does the right thing even when the breakpoint is in the delay slot
3982 of a branch or jump.
3983
3984 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_skip_prologue (@var{gdbarch}, @var{ip})
3985 @findex gdbarch_skip_prologue
3986 A function that returns the address of the ``real'' code beyond the
3987 function entry prologue found at @var{ip}.
3988
3989 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_skip_trampoline_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{pc})
3990 @findex gdbarch_skip_trampoline_code
3991 If the target machine has trampoline code that sits between callers and
3992 the functions being called, then define this function to return a new PC
3993 that is at the start of the real function.
3994
3995 @item int gdbarch_sp_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
3996 @findex gdbarch_sp_regnum
3997 If the stack-pointer is kept in a register, then use this function to return
3998 the number (greater than or equal to zero) of that register, or -1 if
3999 there is no such register.
4000
4001 @item int gdbarch_stab_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{stab_regnr})
4002 @findex gdbarch_stab_reg_to_regnum
4003 Use this function to convert stab register @var{stab_regnr} into @value{GDBN}
4004 regnum. If not defined, no conversion will be done.
4005
4006 @item SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4007 @findex SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4008 The default value of the ``symbol-reloading'' variable. (Never defined in
4009 current sources.)
4010
4011 @item TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4012 @findex TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4013 Number of bits in a char; defaults to 8.
4014
4015 @item int gdbarch_char_signed (@var{gdbarch})
4016 @findex gdbarch_char_signed
4017 Non-zero if @code{char} is normally signed on this architecture; zero if
4018 it should be unsigned.
4019
4020 The ISO C standard requires the compiler to treat @code{char} as
4021 equivalent to either @code{signed char} or @code{unsigned char}; any
4022 character in the standard execution set is supposed to be positive.
4023 Most compilers treat @code{char} as signed, but @code{char} is unsigned
4024 on the IBM S/390, RS6000, and PowerPC targets.
4025
4026 @item int gdbarch_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4027 @findex gdbarch_double_bit
4028 Number of bits in a double float; defaults to @w{@code{8 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4029
4030 @item int gdbarch_float_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4031 @findex gdbarch_float_bit
4032 Number of bits in a float; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4033
4034 @item int gdbarch_int_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4035 @findex gdbarch_int_bit
4036 Number of bits in an integer; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4037
4038 @item int gdbarch_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4039 @findex gdbarch_long_bit
4040 Number of bits in a long integer; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4041
4042 @item int gdbarch_long_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4043 @findex gdbarch_long_double_bit
4044 Number of bits in a long double float;
4045 defaults to @w{@code{2 * gdbarch_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4046
4047 @item int gdbarch_long_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4048 @findex gdbarch_long_long_bit
4049 Number of bits in a long long integer; defaults to
4050 @w{@code{2 * gdbarch_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4051
4052 @item int gdbarch_ptr_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4053 @findex gdbarch_ptr_bit
4054 Number of bits in a pointer; defaults to
4055 @w{@code{gdbarch_int_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4056
4057 @item int gdbarch_short_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4058 @findex gdbarch_short_bit
4059 Number of bits in a short integer; defaults to @w{@code{2 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4060
4061 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_read_pc (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regcache})
4062 @findex gdbarch_read_pc
4063 @itemx gdbarch_write_pc (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regcache}, @var{val})
4064 @findex gdbarch_write_pc
4065 @anchor{gdbarch_write_pc}
4066 @itemx TARGET_READ_SP
4067 @findex TARGET_READ_SP
4068 @itemx TARGET_READ_FP
4069 @findex TARGET_READ_FP
4070 @findex gdbarch_read_pc
4071 @findex gdbarch_write_pc
4072 @findex read_sp
4073 @findex read_fp
4074 @anchor{TARGET_READ_SP} These change the behavior of @code{gdbarch_read_pc},
4075 @code{gdbarch_write_pc}, and @code{read_sp}. For most targets, these may be
4076 left undefined. @value{GDBN} will call the read and write register
4077 functions with the relevant @code{_REGNUM} argument.
4078
4079 These macros and functions are useful when a target keeps one of these
4080 registers in a hard to get at place; for example, part in a segment register
4081 and part in an ordinary register.
4082
4083 @xref{gdbarch_unwind_sp}, which replaces @code{TARGET_READ_SP}.
4084
4085 @item void gdbarch_virtual_frame_pointer (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc}, @var{frame_regnum}, @var{frame_offset})
4086 @findex gdbarch_virtual_frame_pointer
4087 Returns a @code{(register, offset)} pair representing the virtual frame
4088 pointer in use at the code address @var{pc}. If virtual frame pointers
4089 are not used, a default definition simply returns
4090 @code{DEPRECATED_FP_REGNUM}, with an offset of zero.
4091
4092 @item TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
4093 If non-zero, the target has support for hardware-assisted
4094 watchpoints. @xref{Algorithms, watchpoints}, for more details and
4095 other related macros.
4096
4097 @item int gdbarch_print_insn (@var{gdbarch}, @var{vma}, @var{info})
4098 @findex gdbarch_print_insn
4099 This is the function used by @value{GDBN} to print an assembly
4100 instruction. It prints the instruction at address @var{vma} in
4101 debugged memory and returns the length of the instruction, in bytes. If
4102 a target doesn't define its own printing routine, it defaults to an
4103 accessor function for the global pointer
4104 @code{deprecated_tm_print_insn}. This usually points to a function in
4105 the @code{opcodes} library (@pxref{Support Libraries, ,Opcodes}).
4106 @var{info} is a structure (of type @code{disassemble_info}) defined in
4107 @file{include/dis-asm.h} used to pass information to the instruction
4108 decoding routine.
4109
4110 @item frame_id gdbarch_unwind_dummy_id (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame})
4111 @findex gdbarch_unwind_dummy_id
4112 @anchor{gdbarch_unwind_dummy_id} Given @var{frame} return a @w{@code{struct
4113 frame_id}} that uniquely identifies an inferior function call's dummy
4114 frame. The value returned must match the dummy frame stack value
4115 previously saved using @code{SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS}.
4116 @xref{SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS}.
4117
4118 @item DEPRECATED_USE_STRUCT_CONVENTION (@var{gcc_p}, @var{type})
4119 @findex DEPRECATED_USE_STRUCT_CONVENTION
4120 If defined, this must be an expression that is nonzero if a value of the
4121 given @var{type} being returned from a function must have space
4122 allocated for it on the stack. @var{gcc_p} is true if the function
4123 being considered is known to have been compiled by GCC; this is helpful
4124 for systems where GCC is known to use different calling convention than
4125 other compilers.
4126
4127 This method has been deprecated in favour of @code{gdbarch_return_value}
4128 (@pxref{gdbarch_return_value}).
4129
4130 @item void gdbarch_value_to_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
4131 @findex gdbarch_value_to_register
4132 Convert a value of type @var{type} into the raw contents of a register.
4133 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
4134
4135 @end table
4136
4137 Motorola M68K target conditionals.
4138
4139 @ftable @code
4140 @item BPT_VECTOR
4141 Define this to be the 4-bit location of the breakpoint trap vector. If
4142 not defined, it will default to @code{0xf}.
4143
4144 @item REMOTE_BPT_VECTOR
4145 Defaults to @code{1}.
4146
4147 @item const char *gdbarch_name_of_malloc (@var{gdbarch})
4148 @findex gdbarch_name_of_malloc
4149 A string containing the name of the function to call in order to
4150 allocate some memory in the inferior. The default value is "malloc".
4151
4152 @end ftable
4153
4154 @node Adding a New Target
4155 @section Adding a New Target
4156
4157 @cindex adding a target
4158 The following files add a target to @value{GDBN}:
4159
4160 @table @file
4161 @vindex TDEPFILES
4162 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{ttt}.mt
4163 Contains a Makefile fragment specific to this target. Specifies what
4164 object files are needed for target @var{ttt}, by defining
4165 @samp{TDEPFILES=@dots{}} and @samp{TDEPLIBS=@dots{}}. Also specifies
4166 the header file which describes @var{ttt}, by defining @samp{TM_FILE=
4167 tm-@var{ttt}.h}.
4168
4169 You can also define @samp{TM_CFLAGS}, @samp{TM_CLIBS}, @samp{TM_CDEPS},
4170 but these are now deprecated, replaced by autoconf, and may go away in
4171 future versions of @value{GDBN}.
4172
4173 @item gdb/@var{ttt}-tdep.c
4174 Contains any miscellaneous code required for this target machine. On
4175 some machines it doesn't exist at all. Sometimes the macros in
4176 @file{tm-@var{ttt}.h} become very complicated, so they are implemented
4177 as functions here instead, and the macro is simply defined to call the
4178 function. This is vastly preferable, since it is easier to understand
4179 and debug.
4180
4181 @item gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.c
4182 @itemx gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.h
4183 This often exists to describe the basic layout of the target machine's
4184 processor chip (registers, stack, etc.). If used, it is included by
4185 @file{@var{ttt}-tdep.h}. It can be shared among many targets that use
4186 the same processor.
4187
4188 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{ttt}.h
4189 (@file{tm.h} is a link to this file, created by @code{configure}). Contains
4190 macro definitions about the target machine's registers, stack frame
4191 format and instructions.
4192
4193 New targets do not need this file and should not create it.
4194
4195 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{arch}.h
4196 This often exists to describe the basic layout of the target machine's
4197 processor chip (registers, stack, etc.). If used, it is included by
4198 @file{tm-@var{ttt}.h}. It can be shared among many targets that use the
4199 same processor.
4200
4201 New targets do not need this file and should not create it.
4202
4203 @end table
4204
4205 If you are adding a new operating system for an existing CPU chip, add a
4206 @file{config/tm-@var{os}.h} file that describes the operating system
4207 facilities that are unusual (extra symbol table info; the breakpoint
4208 instruction needed; etc.). Then write a @file{@var{arch}/tm-@var{os}.h}
4209 that just @code{#include}s @file{tm-@var{arch}.h} and
4210 @file{config/tm-@var{os}.h}.
4211
4212 @node Target Descriptions
4213 @chapter Target Descriptions
4214 @cindex target descriptions
4215
4216 The target architecture definition (@pxref{Target Architecture Definition})
4217 contains @value{GDBN}'s hard-coded knowledge about an architecture. For
4218 some platforms, it is handy to have more flexible knowledge about a specific
4219 instance of the architecture---for instance, a processor or development board.
4220 @dfn{Target descriptions} provide a mechanism for the user to tell @value{GDBN}
4221 more about what their target supports, or for the target to tell @value{GDBN}
4222 directly.
4223
4224 For details on writing, automatically supplying, and manually selecting
4225 target descriptions, see @ref{Target Descriptions, , , gdb,
4226 Debugging with @value{GDBN}}. This section will cover some related
4227 topics about the @value{GDBN} internals.
4228
4229 @menu
4230 * Target Descriptions Implementation::
4231 * Adding Target Described Register Support::
4232 @end menu
4233
4234 @node Target Descriptions Implementation
4235 @section Target Descriptions Implementation
4236 @cindex target descriptions, implementation
4237
4238 Before @value{GDBN} connects to a new target, or runs a new program on
4239 an existing target, it discards any existing target description and
4240 reverts to a default gdbarch. Then, after connecting, it looks for a
4241 new target description by calling @code{target_find_description}.
4242
4243 A description may come from a user specified file (XML), the remote
4244 @samp{qXfer:features:read} packet (also XML), or from any custom
4245 @code{to_read_description} routine in the target vector. For instance,
4246 the remote target supports guessing whether a MIPS target is 32-bit or
4247 64-bit based on the size of the @samp{g} packet.
4248
4249 If any target description is found, @value{GDBN} creates a new gdbarch
4250 incorporating the description by calling @code{gdbarch_update_p}. Any
4251 @samp{<architecture>} element is handled first, to determine which
4252 architecture's gdbarch initialization routine is called to create the
4253 new architecture. Then the initialization routine is called, and has
4254 a chance to adjust the constructed architecture based on the contents
4255 of the target description. For instance, it can recognize any
4256 properties set by a @code{to_read_description} routine. Also
4257 see @ref{Adding Target Described Register Support}.
4258
4259 @node Adding Target Described Register Support
4260 @section Adding Target Described Register Support
4261 @cindex target descriptions, adding register support
4262
4263 Target descriptions can report additional registers specific to an
4264 instance of the target. But it takes a little work in the architecture
4265 specific routines to support this.
4266
4267 A target description must either have no registers or a complete
4268 set---this avoids complexity in trying to merge standard registers
4269 with the target defined registers. It is the architecture's
4270 responsibility to validate that a description with registers has
4271 everything it needs. To keep architecture code simple, the same
4272 mechanism is used to assign fixed internal register numbers to
4273 standard registers.
4274
4275 If @code{tdesc_has_registers} returns 1, the description contains
4276 registers. The architecture's @code{gdbarch_init} routine should:
4277
4278 @itemize @bullet
4279
4280 @item
4281 Call @code{tdesc_data_alloc} to allocate storage, early, before
4282 searching for a matching gdbarch or allocating a new one.
4283
4284 @item
4285 Use @code{tdesc_find_feature} to locate standard features by name.
4286
4287 @item
4288 Use @code{tdesc_numbered_register} and @code{tdesc_numbered_register_choices}
4289 to locate the expected registers in the standard features.
4290
4291 @item
4292 Return @code{NULL} if a required feature is missing, or if any standard
4293 feature is missing expected registers. This will produce a warning that
4294 the description was incomplete.
4295
4296 @item
4297 Free the allocated data before returning, unless @code{tdesc_use_registers}
4298 is called.
4299
4300 @item
4301 Call @code{set_gdbarch_num_regs} as usual, with a number higher than any
4302 fixed number passed to @code{tdesc_numbered_register}.
4303
4304 @item
4305 Call @code{tdesc_use_registers} after creating a new gdbarch, before
4306 returning it.
4307
4308 @end itemize
4309
4310 After @code{tdesc_use_registers} has been called, the architecture's
4311 @code{register_name}, @code{register_type}, and @code{register_reggroup_p}
4312 routines will not be called; that information will be taken from
4313 the target description. @code{num_regs} may be increased to account
4314 for any additional registers in the description.
4315
4316 Pseudo-registers require some extra care:
4317
4318 @itemize @bullet
4319
4320 @item
4321 Using @code{tdesc_numbered_register} allows the architecture to give
4322 constant register numbers to standard architectural registers, e.g.@:
4323 as an @code{enum} in @file{@var{arch}-tdep.h}. But because
4324 pseudo-registers are always numbered above @code{num_regs},
4325 which may be increased by the description, constant numbers
4326 can not be used for pseudos. They must be numbered relative to
4327 @code{num_regs} instead.
4328
4329 @item
4330 The description will not describe pseudo-registers, so the
4331 architecture must call @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_name},
4332 @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_type}, and
4333 @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_reggroup_p} to supply routines
4334 describing pseudo registers. These routines will be passed
4335 internal register numbers, so the same routines used for the
4336 gdbarch equivalents are usually suitable.
4337
4338 @end itemize
4339
4340
4341 @node Target Vector Definition
4342
4343 @chapter Target Vector Definition
4344 @cindex target vector
4345
4346 The target vector defines the interface between @value{GDBN}'s
4347 abstract handling of target systems, and the nitty-gritty code that
4348 actually exercises control over a process or a serial port.
4349 @value{GDBN} includes some 30-40 different target vectors; however,
4350 each configuration of @value{GDBN} includes only a few of them.
4351
4352 @menu
4353 * Managing Execution State::
4354 * Existing Targets::
4355 @end menu
4356
4357 @node Managing Execution State
4358 @section Managing Execution State
4359 @cindex execution state
4360
4361 A target vector can be completely inactive (not pushed on the target
4362 stack), active but not running (pushed, but not connected to a fully
4363 manifested inferior), or completely active (pushed, with an accessible
4364 inferior). Most targets are only completely inactive or completely
4365 active, but some support persistent connections to a target even
4366 when the target has exited or not yet started.
4367
4368 For example, connecting to the simulator using @code{target sim} does
4369 not create a running program. Neither registers nor memory are
4370 accessible until @code{run}. Similarly, after @code{kill}, the
4371 program can not continue executing. But in both cases @value{GDBN}
4372 remains connected to the simulator, and target-specific commands
4373 are directed to the simulator.
4374
4375 A target which only supports complete activation should push itself
4376 onto the stack in its @code{to_open} routine (by calling
4377 @code{push_target}), and unpush itself from the stack in its
4378 @code{to_mourn_inferior} routine (by calling @code{unpush_target}).
4379
4380 A target which supports both partial and complete activation should
4381 still call @code{push_target} in @code{to_open}, but not call
4382 @code{unpush_target} in @code{to_mourn_inferior}. Instead, it should
4383 call either @code{target_mark_running} or @code{target_mark_exited}
4384 in its @code{to_open}, depending on whether the target is fully active
4385 after connection. It should also call @code{target_mark_running} any
4386 time the inferior becomes fully active (e.g.@: in
4387 @code{to_create_inferior} and @code{to_attach}), and
4388 @code{target_mark_exited} when the inferior becomes inactive (in
4389 @code{to_mourn_inferior}). The target should also make sure to call
4390 @code{target_mourn_inferior} from its @code{to_kill}, to return the
4391 target to inactive state.
4392
4393 @node Existing Targets
4394 @section Existing Targets
4395 @cindex targets
4396
4397 @subsection File Targets
4398
4399 Both executables and core files have target vectors.
4400
4401 @subsection Standard Protocol and Remote Stubs
4402
4403 @value{GDBN}'s file @file{remote.c} talks a serial protocol to code
4404 that runs in the target system. @value{GDBN} provides several sample
4405 @dfn{stubs} that can be integrated into target programs or operating
4406 systems for this purpose; they are named @file{*-stub.c}.
4407
4408 The @value{GDBN} user's manual describes how to put such a stub into
4409 your target code. What follows is a discussion of integrating the
4410 SPARC stub into a complicated operating system (rather than a simple
4411 program), by Stu Grossman, the author of this stub.
4412
4413 The trap handling code in the stub assumes the following upon entry to
4414 @code{trap_low}:
4415
4416 @enumerate
4417 @item
4418 %l1 and %l2 contain pc and npc respectively at the time of the trap;
4419
4420 @item
4421 traps are disabled;
4422
4423 @item
4424 you are in the correct trap window.
4425 @end enumerate
4426
4427 As long as your trap handler can guarantee those conditions, then there
4428 is no reason why you shouldn't be able to ``share'' traps with the stub.
4429 The stub has no requirement that it be jumped to directly from the
4430 hardware trap vector. That is why it calls @code{exceptionHandler()},
4431 which is provided by the external environment. For instance, this could
4432 set up the hardware traps to actually execute code which calls the stub
4433 first, and then transfers to its own trap handler.
4434
4435 For the most point, there probably won't be much of an issue with
4436 ``sharing'' traps, as the traps we use are usually not used by the kernel,
4437 and often indicate unrecoverable error conditions. Anyway, this is all
4438 controlled by a table, and is trivial to modify. The most important
4439 trap for us is for @code{ta 1}. Without that, we can't single step or
4440 do breakpoints. Everything else is unnecessary for the proper operation
4441 of the debugger/stub.
4442
4443 From reading the stub, it's probably not obvious how breakpoints work.
4444 They are simply done by deposit/examine operations from @value{GDBN}.
4445
4446 @subsection ROM Monitor Interface
4447
4448 @subsection Custom Protocols
4449
4450 @subsection Transport Layer
4451
4452 @subsection Builtin Simulator
4453
4454
4455 @node Native Debugging
4456
4457 @chapter Native Debugging
4458 @cindex native debugging
4459
4460 Several files control @value{GDBN}'s configuration for native support:
4461
4462 @table @file
4463 @vindex NATDEPFILES
4464 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
4465 Specifies Makefile fragments needed by a @emph{native} configuration on
4466 machine @var{xyz}. In particular, this lists the required
4467 native-dependent object files, by defining @samp{NATDEPFILES=@dots{}}.
4468 Also specifies the header file which describes native support on
4469 @var{xyz}, by defining @samp{NAT_FILE= nm-@var{xyz}.h}. You can also
4470 define @samp{NAT_CFLAGS}, @samp{NAT_ADD_FILES}, @samp{NAT_CLIBS},
4471 @samp{NAT_CDEPS}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
4472
4473 @emph{Maintainer's note: The @file{.mh} suffix is because this file
4474 originally contained @file{Makefile} fragments for hosting @value{GDBN}
4475 on machine @var{xyz}. While the file is no longer used for this
4476 purpose, the @file{.mh} suffix remains. Perhaps someone will
4477 eventually rename these fragments so that they have a @file{.mn}
4478 suffix.}
4479
4480 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/nm-@var{xyz}.h
4481 (@file{nm.h} is a link to this file, created by @code{configure}). Contains C
4482 macro definitions describing the native system environment, such as
4483 child process control and core file support.
4484
4485 @item gdb/@var{xyz}-nat.c
4486 Contains any miscellaneous C code required for this native support of
4487 this machine. On some machines it doesn't exist at all.
4488 @end table
4489
4490 There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
4491 various systems. These can be customized in various ways by macros
4492 defined in your @file{nm-@var{xyz}.h} file. If these routines work for
4493 the @var{xyz} host, you can just include the generic file's name (with
4494 @samp{.o}, not @samp{.c}) in @code{NATDEPFILES}.
4495
4496 Otherwise, if your machine needs custom support routines, you will need
4497 to write routines that perform the same functions as the generic file.
4498 Put them into @file{@var{xyz}-nat.c}, and put @file{@var{xyz}-nat.o}
4499 into @code{NATDEPFILES}.
4500
4501 @table @file
4502 @item inftarg.c
4503 This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
4504 processes on systems which use ptrace and wait to control the child.
4505
4506 @item procfs.c
4507 This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
4508 processes on systems which use /proc to control the child.
4509
4510 @item fork-child.c
4511 This does the low-level grunge that uses Unix system calls to do a ``fork
4512 and exec'' to start up a child process.
4513
4514 @item infptrace.c
4515 This is the low level interface to inferior processes for systems using
4516 the Unix @code{ptrace} call in a vanilla way.
4517 @end table
4518
4519 @section Native core file Support
4520 @cindex native core files
4521
4522 @table @file
4523 @findex fetch_core_registers
4524 @item core-aout.c::fetch_core_registers()
4525 Support for reading registers out of a core file. This routine calls
4526 @code{register_addr()}, see below. Now that BFD is used to read core
4527 files, virtually all machines should use @code{core-aout.c}, and should
4528 just provide @code{fetch_core_registers} in @code{@var{xyz}-nat.c} (or
4529 @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR} in @code{nm-@var{xyz}.h}).
4530
4531 @item core-aout.c::register_addr()
4532 If your @code{nm-@var{xyz}.h} file defines the macro
4533 @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR(addr, blockend, regno)}, it should be defined to
4534 set @code{addr} to the offset within the @samp{user} struct of @value{GDBN}
4535 register number @code{regno}. @code{blockend} is the offset within the
4536 ``upage'' of @code{u.u_ar0}. If @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR} is defined,
4537 @file{core-aout.c} will define the @code{register_addr()} function and
4538 use the macro in it. If you do not define @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR}, but
4539 you are using the standard @code{fetch_core_registers()}, you will need
4540 to define your own version of @code{register_addr()}, put it into your
4541 @code{@var{xyz}-nat.c} file, and be sure @code{@var{xyz}-nat.o} is in
4542 the @code{NATDEPFILES} list. If you have your own
4543 @code{fetch_core_registers()}, you may not need a separate
4544 @code{register_addr()}. Many custom @code{fetch_core_registers()}
4545 implementations simply locate the registers themselves.@refill
4546 @end table
4547
4548 When making @value{GDBN} run native on a new operating system, to make it
4549 possible to debug core files, you will need to either write specific
4550 code for parsing your OS's core files, or customize
4551 @file{bfd/trad-core.c}. First, use whatever @code{#include} files your
4552 machine uses to define the struct of registers that is accessible
4553 (possibly in the u-area) in a core file (rather than
4554 @file{machine/reg.h}), and an include file that defines whatever header
4555 exists on a core file (e.g., the u-area or a @code{struct core}). Then
4556 modify @code{trad_unix_core_file_p} to use these values to set up the
4557 section information for the data segment, stack segment, any other
4558 segments in the core file (perhaps shared library contents or control
4559 information), ``registers'' segment, and if there are two discontiguous
4560 sets of registers (e.g., integer and float), the ``reg2'' segment. This
4561 section information basically delimits areas in the core file in a
4562 standard way, which the section-reading routines in BFD know how to seek
4563 around in.
4564
4565 Then back in @value{GDBN}, you need a matching routine called
4566 @code{fetch_core_registers}. If you can use the generic one, it's in
4567 @file{core-aout.c}; if not, it's in your @file{@var{xyz}-nat.c} file.
4568 It will be passed a char pointer to the entire ``registers'' segment,
4569 its length, and a zero; or a char pointer to the entire ``regs2''
4570 segment, its length, and a 2. The routine should suck out the supplied
4571 register values and install them into @value{GDBN}'s ``registers'' array.
4572
4573 If your system uses @file{/proc} to control processes, and uses ELF
4574 format core files, then you may be able to use the same routines for
4575 reading the registers out of processes and out of core files.
4576
4577 @section ptrace
4578
4579 @section /proc
4580
4581 @section win32
4582
4583 @section shared libraries
4584
4585 @section Native Conditionals
4586 @cindex native conditionals
4587
4588 When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
4589 defined or left undefined, to control compilation when the host and
4590 target systems are the same. These macros should be defined (or left
4591 undefined) in @file{nm-@var{system}.h}.
4592
4593 @table @code
4594
4595 @item CHILD_PREPARE_TO_STORE
4596 @findex CHILD_PREPARE_TO_STORE
4597 If the machine stores all registers at once in the child process, then
4598 define this to ensure that all values are correct. This usually entails
4599 a read from the child.
4600
4601 [Note that this is incorrectly defined in @file{xm-@var{system}.h} files
4602 currently.]
4603
4604 @item FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS
4605 @findex FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS
4606 Define this if the native-dependent code will provide its own routines
4607 @code{fetch_inferior_registers} and @code{store_inferior_registers} in
4608 @file{@var{host}-nat.c}. If this symbol is @emph{not} defined, and
4609 @file{infptrace.c} is included in this configuration, the default
4610 routines in @file{infptrace.c} are used for these functions.
4611
4612 @item int gdbarch_fp0_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
4613 @findex gdbarch_fp0_regnum
4614 This functions normally returns the number of the first floating
4615 point register, if the machine has such registers. As such, it would
4616 appear only in target-specific code. However, @file{/proc} support uses this
4617 to decide whether floats are in use on this target.
4618
4619 @item int gdbarch_get_longjmp_target (@var{gdbarch})
4620 @findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
4621 For most machines, this is a target-dependent parameter. On the
4622 DECstation and the Iris, this is a native-dependent parameter, since
4623 @file{setjmp.h} is needed to define it.
4624
4625 This function determines the target PC address that @code{longjmp} will jump to,
4626 assuming that we have just stopped at a longjmp breakpoint. It takes a
4627 @code{CORE_ADDR *} as argument, and stores the target PC value through this
4628 pointer. It examines the current state of the machine as needed.
4629
4630 @item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
4631 An x86-based machine can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
4632 support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
4633
4634 @item ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT
4635 @findex ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT
4636 Define this to be able to, when a breakpoint insertion fails, warn the
4637 user that another process may be running with the same executable.
4638
4639 @item PROC_NAME_FMT
4640 @findex PROC_NAME_FMT
4641 Defines the format for the name of a @file{/proc} device. Should be
4642 defined in @file{nm.h} @emph{only} in order to override the default
4643 definition in @file{procfs.c}.
4644
4645 @item SHELL_COMMAND_CONCAT
4646 @findex SHELL_COMMAND_CONCAT
4647 If defined, is a string to prefix on the shell command used to start the
4648 inferior.
4649
4650 @item SHELL_FILE
4651 @findex SHELL_FILE
4652 If defined, this is the name of the shell to use to run the inferior.
4653 Defaults to @code{"/bin/sh"}.
4654
4655 @item SOLIB_ADD (@var{filename}, @var{from_tty}, @var{targ}, @var{readsyms})
4656 @findex SOLIB_ADD
4657 Define this to expand into an expression that will cause the symbols in
4658 @var{filename} to be added to @value{GDBN}'s symbol table. If
4659 @var{readsyms} is zero symbols are not read but any necessary low level
4660 processing for @var{filename} is still done.
4661
4662 @item SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
4663 @findex SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
4664 Define this to expand into any shared-library-relocation code that you
4665 want to be run just after the child process has been forked.
4666
4667 @item START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
4668 @findex START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
4669 When starting an inferior, @value{GDBN} normally expects to trap
4670 twice; once when
4671 the shell execs, and once when the program itself execs. If the actual
4672 number of traps is something other than 2, then define this macro to
4673 expand into the number expected.
4674
4675 @item CLEAR_SOLIB
4676 @findex CLEAR_SOLIB
4677 See @file{objfiles.c}.
4678
4679 @end table
4680
4681 @node Support Libraries
4682
4683 @chapter Support Libraries
4684
4685 @section BFD
4686 @cindex BFD library
4687
4688 BFD provides support for @value{GDBN} in several ways:
4689
4690 @table @emph
4691 @item identifying executable and core files
4692 BFD will identify a variety of file types, including a.out, coff, and
4693 several variants thereof, as well as several kinds of core files.
4694
4695 @item access to sections of files
4696 BFD parses the file headers to determine the names, virtual addresses,
4697 sizes, and file locations of all the various named sections in files
4698 (such as the text section or the data section). @value{GDBN} simply
4699 calls BFD to read or write section @var{x} at byte offset @var{y} for
4700 length @var{z}.
4701
4702 @item specialized core file support
4703 BFD provides routines to determine the failing command name stored in a
4704 core file, the signal with which the program failed, and whether a core
4705 file matches (i.e.@: could be a core dump of) a particular executable
4706 file.
4707
4708 @item locating the symbol information
4709 @value{GDBN} uses an internal interface of BFD to determine where to find the
4710 symbol information in an executable file or symbol-file. @value{GDBN} itself
4711 handles the reading of symbols, since BFD does not ``understand'' debug
4712 symbols, but @value{GDBN} uses BFD's cached information to find the symbols,
4713 string table, etc.
4714 @end table
4715
4716 @section opcodes
4717 @cindex opcodes library
4718
4719 The opcodes library provides @value{GDBN}'s disassembler. (It's a separate
4720 library because it's also used in binutils, for @file{objdump}).
4721
4722 @section readline
4723 @cindex readline library
4724 The @code{readline} library provides a set of functions for use by applications
4725 that allow users to edit command lines as they are typed in.
4726
4727 @section libiberty
4728 @cindex @code{libiberty} library
4729
4730 The @code{libiberty} library provides a set of functions and features
4731 that integrate and improve on functionality found in modern operating
4732 systems. Broadly speaking, such features can be divided into three
4733 groups: supplemental functions (functions that may be missing in some
4734 environments and operating systems), replacement functions (providing
4735 a uniform and easier to use interface for commonly used standard
4736 functions), and extensions (which provide additional functionality
4737 beyond standard functions).
4738
4739 @value{GDBN} uses various features provided by the @code{libiberty}
4740 library, for instance the C@t{++} demangler, the @acronym{IEEE}
4741 floating format support functions, the input options parser
4742 @samp{getopt}, the @samp{obstack} extension, and other functions.
4743
4744 @subsection @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN}
4745 @cindex @code{obstacks}
4746
4747 The obstack mechanism provides a convenient way to allocate and free
4748 chunks of memory. Each obstack is a pool of memory that is managed
4749 like a stack. Objects (of any nature, size and alignment) are
4750 allocated and freed in a @acronym{LIFO} fashion on an obstack (see
4751 @code{libiberty}'s documentation for a more detailed explanation of
4752 @code{obstacks}).
4753
4754 The most noticeable use of the @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN} is in
4755 object files. There is an obstack associated with each internal
4756 representation of an object file. Lots of things get allocated on
4757 these @code{obstacks}: dictionary entries, blocks, blockvectors,
4758 symbols, minimal symbols, types, vectors of fundamental types, class
4759 fields of types, object files section lists, object files section
4760 offset lists, line tables, symbol tables, partial symbol tables,
4761 string tables, symbol table private data, macros tables, debug
4762 information sections and entries, import and export lists (som),
4763 unwind information (hppa), dwarf2 location expressions data. Plus
4764 various strings such as directory names strings, debug format strings,
4765 names of types.
4766
4767 An essential and convenient property of all data on @code{obstacks} is
4768 that memory for it gets allocated (with @code{obstack_alloc}) at
4769 various times during a debugging session, but it is released all at
4770 once using the @code{obstack_free} function. The @code{obstack_free}
4771 function takes a pointer to where in the stack it must start the
4772 deletion from (much like the cleanup chains have a pointer to where to
4773 start the cleanups). Because of the stack like structure of the
4774 @code{obstacks}, this allows to free only a top portion of the
4775 obstack. There are a few instances in @value{GDBN} where such thing
4776 happens. Calls to @code{obstack_free} are done after some local data
4777 is allocated to the obstack. Only the local data is deleted from the
4778 obstack. Of course this assumes that nothing between the
4779 @code{obstack_alloc} and the @code{obstack_free} allocates anything
4780 else on the same obstack. For this reason it is best and safest to
4781 use temporary @code{obstacks}.
4782
4783 Releasing the whole obstack is also not safe per se. It is safe only
4784 under the condition that we know the @code{obstacks} memory is no
4785 longer needed. In @value{GDBN} we get rid of the @code{obstacks} only
4786 when we get rid of the whole objfile(s), for instance upon reading a
4787 new symbol file.
4788
4789 @section gnu-regex
4790 @cindex regular expressions library
4791
4792 Regex conditionals.
4793
4794 @table @code
4795 @item C_ALLOCA
4796
4797 @item NFAILURES
4798
4799 @item RE_NREGS
4800
4801 @item SIGN_EXTEND_CHAR
4802
4803 @item SWITCH_ENUM_BUG
4804
4805 @item SYNTAX_TABLE
4806
4807 @item Sword
4808
4809 @item sparc
4810 @end table
4811
4812 @section Array Containers
4813 @cindex Array Containers
4814 @cindex VEC
4815
4816 Often it is necessary to manipulate a dynamic array of a set of
4817 objects. C forces some bookkeeping on this, which can get cumbersome
4818 and repetitive. The @file{vec.h} file contains macros for defining
4819 and using a typesafe vector type. The functions defined will be
4820 inlined when compiling, and so the abstraction cost should be zero.
4821 Domain checks are added to detect programming errors.
4822
4823 An example use would be an array of symbols or section information.
4824 The array can be grown as symbols are read in (or preallocated), and
4825 the accessor macros provided keep care of all the necessary
4826 bookkeeping. Because the arrays are type safe, there is no danger of
4827 accidentally mixing up the contents. Think of these as C++ templates,
4828 but implemented in C.
4829
4830 Because of the different behavior of structure objects, scalar objects
4831 and of pointers, there are three flavors of vector, one for each of
4832 these variants. Both the structure object and pointer variants pass
4833 pointers to objects around --- in the former case the pointers are
4834 stored into the vector and in the latter case the pointers are
4835 dereferenced and the objects copied into the vector. The scalar
4836 object variant is suitable for @code{int}-like objects, and the vector
4837 elements are returned by value.
4838
4839 There are both @code{index} and @code{iterate} accessors. The iterator
4840 returns a boolean iteration condition and updates the iteration
4841 variable passed by reference. Because the iterator will be inlined,
4842 the address-of can be optimized away.
4843
4844 The vectors are implemented using the trailing array idiom, thus they
4845 are not resizeable without changing the address of the vector object
4846 itself. This means you cannot have variables or fields of vector type
4847 --- always use a pointer to a vector. The one exception is the final
4848 field of a structure, which could be a vector type. You will have to
4849 use the @code{embedded_size} & @code{embedded_init} calls to create
4850 such objects, and they will probably not be resizeable (so don't use
4851 the @dfn{safe} allocation variants). The trailing array idiom is used
4852 (rather than a pointer to an array of data), because, if we allow
4853 @code{NULL} to also represent an empty vector, empty vectors occupy
4854 minimal space in the structure containing them.
4855
4856 Each operation that increases the number of active elements is
4857 available in @dfn{quick} and @dfn{safe} variants. The former presumes
4858 that there is sufficient allocated space for the operation to succeed
4859 (it dies if there is not). The latter will reallocate the vector, if
4860 needed. Reallocation causes an exponential increase in vector size.
4861 If you know you will be adding N elements, it would be more efficient
4862 to use the reserve operation before adding the elements with the
4863 @dfn{quick} operation. This will ensure there are at least as many
4864 elements as you ask for, it will exponentially increase if there are
4865 too few spare slots. If you want reserve a specific number of slots,
4866 but do not want the exponential increase (for instance, you know this
4867 is the last allocation), use a negative number for reservation. You
4868 can also create a vector of a specific size from the get go.
4869
4870 You should prefer the push and pop operations, as they append and
4871 remove from the end of the vector. If you need to remove several items
4872 in one go, use the truncate operation. The insert and remove
4873 operations allow you to change elements in the middle of the vector.
4874 There are two remove operations, one which preserves the element
4875 ordering @code{ordered_remove}, and one which does not
4876 @code{unordered_remove}. The latter function copies the end element
4877 into the removed slot, rather than invoke a memmove operation. The
4878 @code{lower_bound} function will determine where to place an item in
4879 the array using insert that will maintain sorted order.
4880
4881 If you need to directly manipulate a vector, then the @code{address}
4882 accessor will return the address of the start of the vector. Also the
4883 @code{space} predicate will tell you whether there is spare capacity in the
4884 vector. You will not normally need to use these two functions.
4885
4886 Vector types are defined using a
4887 @code{DEF_VEC_@{O,P,I@}(@var{typename})} macro. Variables of vector
4888 type are declared using a @code{VEC(@var{typename})} macro. The
4889 characters @code{O}, @code{P} and @code{I} indicate whether
4890 @var{typename} is an object (@code{O}), pointer (@code{P}) or integral
4891 (@code{I}) type. Be careful to pick the correct one, as you'll get an
4892 awkward and inefficient API if you use the wrong one. There is a
4893 check, which results in a compile-time warning, for the @code{P} and
4894 @code{I} versions, but there is no check for the @code{O} versions, as
4895 that is not possible in plain C.
4896
4897 An example of their use would be,
4898
4899 @smallexample
4900 DEF_VEC_P(tree); // non-managed tree vector.
4901
4902 struct my_struct @{
4903 VEC(tree) *v; // A (pointer to) a vector of tree pointers.
4904 @};
4905
4906 struct my_struct *s;
4907
4908 if (VEC_length(tree, s->v)) @{ we have some contents @}
4909 VEC_safe_push(tree, s->v, decl); // append some decl onto the end
4910 for (ix = 0; VEC_iterate(tree, s->v, ix, elt); ix++)
4911 @{ do something with elt @}
4912
4913 @end smallexample
4914
4915 The @file{vec.h} file provides details on how to invoke the various
4916 accessors provided. They are enumerated here:
4917
4918 @table @code
4919 @item VEC_length
4920 Return the number of items in the array,
4921
4922 @item VEC_empty
4923 Return true if the array has no elements.
4924
4925 @item VEC_last
4926 @itemx VEC_index
4927 Return the last or arbitrary item in the array.
4928
4929 @item VEC_iterate
4930 Access an array element and indicate whether the array has been
4931 traversed.
4932
4933 @item VEC_alloc
4934 @itemx VEC_free
4935 Create and destroy an array.
4936
4937 @item VEC_embedded_size
4938 @itemx VEC_embedded_init
4939 Helpers for embedding an array as the final element of another struct.
4940
4941 @item VEC_copy
4942 Duplicate an array.
4943
4944 @item VEC_space
4945 Return the amount of free space in an array.
4946
4947 @item VEC_reserve
4948 Ensure a certain amount of free space.
4949
4950 @item VEC_quick_push
4951 @itemx VEC_safe_push
4952 Append to an array, either assuming the space is available, or making
4953 sure that it is.
4954
4955 @item VEC_pop
4956 Remove the last item from an array.
4957
4958 @item VEC_truncate
4959 Remove several items from the end of an array.
4960
4961 @item VEC_safe_grow
4962 Add several items to the end of an array.
4963
4964 @item VEC_replace
4965 Overwrite an item in the array.
4966
4967 @item VEC_quick_insert
4968 @itemx VEC_safe_insert
4969 Insert an item into the middle of the array. Either the space must
4970 already exist, or the space is created.
4971
4972 @item VEC_ordered_remove
4973 @itemx VEC_unordered_remove
4974 Remove an item from the array, preserving order or not.
4975
4976 @item VEC_block_remove
4977 Remove a set of items from the array.
4978
4979 @item VEC_address
4980 Provide the address of the first element.
4981
4982 @item VEC_lower_bound
4983 Binary search the array.
4984
4985 @end table
4986
4987 @section include
4988
4989 @node Coding
4990
4991 @chapter Coding
4992
4993 This chapter covers topics that are lower-level than the major
4994 algorithms of @value{GDBN}.
4995
4996 @section Cleanups
4997 @cindex cleanups
4998
4999 Cleanups are a structured way to deal with things that need to be done
5000 later.
5001
5002 When your code does something (e.g., @code{xmalloc} some memory, or
5003 @code{open} a file) that needs to be undone later (e.g., @code{xfree}
5004 the memory or @code{close} the file), it can make a cleanup. The
5005 cleanup will be done at some future point: when the command is finished
5006 and control returns to the top level; when an error occurs and the stack
5007 is unwound; or when your code decides it's time to explicitly perform
5008 cleanups. Alternatively you can elect to discard the cleanups you
5009 created.
5010
5011 Syntax:
5012
5013 @table @code
5014 @item struct cleanup *@var{old_chain};
5015 Declare a variable which will hold a cleanup chain handle.
5016
5017 @findex make_cleanup
5018 @item @var{old_chain} = make_cleanup (@var{function}, @var{arg});
5019 Make a cleanup which will cause @var{function} to be called with
5020 @var{arg} (a @code{char *}) later. The result, @var{old_chain}, is a
5021 handle that can later be passed to @code{do_cleanups} or
5022 @code{discard_cleanups}. Unless you are going to call
5023 @code{do_cleanups} or @code{discard_cleanups}, you can ignore the result
5024 from @code{make_cleanup}.
5025
5026 @findex do_cleanups
5027 @item do_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
5028 Do all cleanups added to the chain since the corresponding
5029 @code{make_cleanup} call was made.
5030
5031 @findex discard_cleanups
5032 @item discard_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
5033 Same as @code{do_cleanups} except that it just removes the cleanups from
5034 the chain and does not call the specified functions.
5035 @end table
5036
5037 Cleanups are implemented as a chain. The handle returned by
5038 @code{make_cleanups} includes the cleanup passed to the call and any
5039 later cleanups appended to the chain (but not yet discarded or
5040 performed). E.g.:
5041
5042 @smallexample
5043 make_cleanup (a, 0);
5044 @{
5045 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (b, 0);
5046 make_cleanup (c, 0)
5047 ...
5048 do_cleanups (old);
5049 @}
5050 @end smallexample
5051
5052 @noindent
5053 will call @code{c()} and @code{b()} but will not call @code{a()}. The
5054 cleanup that calls @code{a()} will remain in the cleanup chain, and will
5055 be done later unless otherwise discarded.@refill
5056
5057 Your function should explicitly do or discard the cleanups it creates.
5058 Failing to do this leads to non-deterministic behavior since the caller
5059 will arbitrarily do or discard your functions cleanups. This need leads
5060 to two common cleanup styles.
5061
5062 The first style is try/finally. Before it exits, your code-block calls
5063 @code{do_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that your
5064 code-block's cleanups are always performed. For instance, the following
5065 code-segment avoids a memory leak problem (even when @code{error} is
5066 called and a forced stack unwind occurs) by ensuring that the
5067 @code{xfree} will always be called:
5068
5069 @smallexample
5070 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (null_cleanup, 0);
5071 data = xmalloc (sizeof blah);
5072 make_cleanup (xfree, data);
5073 ... blah blah ...
5074 do_cleanups (old);
5075 @end smallexample
5076
5077 The second style is try/except. Before it exits, your code-block calls
5078 @code{discard_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that
5079 any created cleanups are not performed. For instance, the following
5080 code segment, ensures that the file will be closed but only if there is
5081 an error:
5082
5083 @smallexample
5084 FILE *file = fopen ("afile", "r");
5085 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (close_file, file);
5086 ... blah blah ...
5087 discard_cleanups (old);
5088 return file;
5089 @end smallexample
5090
5091 Some functions, e.g., @code{fputs_filtered()} or @code{error()}, specify
5092 that they ``should not be called when cleanups are not in place''. This
5093 means that any actions you need to reverse in the case of an error or
5094 interruption must be on the cleanup chain before you call these
5095 functions, since they might never return to your code (they
5096 @samp{longjmp} instead).
5097
5098 @section Per-architecture module data
5099 @cindex per-architecture module data
5100 @cindex multi-arch data
5101 @cindex data-pointer, per-architecture/per-module
5102
5103 The multi-arch framework includes a mechanism for adding module
5104 specific per-architecture data-pointers to the @code{struct gdbarch}
5105 architecture object.
5106
5107 A module registers one or more per-architecture data-pointers using:
5108
5109 @deftypefun struct gdbarch_data *gdbarch_data_register_pre_init (gdbarch_data_pre_init_ftype *@var{pre_init})
5110 @var{pre_init} is used to, on-demand, allocate an initial value for a
5111 per-architecture data-pointer using the architecture's obstack (passed
5112 in as a parameter). Since @var{pre_init} can be called during
5113 architecture creation, it is not parameterized with the architecture.
5114 and must not call modules that use per-architecture data.
5115 @end deftypefun
5116
5117 @deftypefun struct gdbarch_data *gdbarch_data_register_post_init (gdbarch_data_post_init_ftype *@var{post_init})
5118 @var{post_init} is used to obtain an initial value for a
5119 per-architecture data-pointer @emph{after}. Since @var{post_init} is
5120 always called after architecture creation, it both receives the fully
5121 initialized architecture and is free to call modules that use
5122 per-architecture data (care needs to be taken to ensure that those
5123 other modules do not try to call back to this module as that will
5124 create in cycles in the initialization call graph).
5125 @end deftypefun
5126
5127 These functions return a @code{struct gdbarch_data} that is used to
5128 identify the per-architecture data-pointer added for that module.
5129
5130 The per-architecture data-pointer is accessed using the function:
5131
5132 @deftypefun void *gdbarch_data (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct gdbarch_data *@var{data_handle})
5133 Given the architecture @var{arch} and module data handle
5134 @var{data_handle} (returned by @code{gdbarch_data_register_pre_init}
5135 or @code{gdbarch_data_register_post_init}), this function returns the
5136 current value of the per-architecture data-pointer. If the data
5137 pointer is @code{NULL}, it is first initialized by calling the
5138 corresponding @var{pre_init} or @var{post_init} method.
5139 @end deftypefun
5140
5141 The examples below assume the following definitions:
5142
5143 @smallexample
5144 struct nozel @{ int total; @};
5145 static struct gdbarch_data *nozel_handle;
5146 @end smallexample
5147
5148 A module can extend the architecture vector, adding additional
5149 per-architecture data, using the @var{pre_init} method. The module's
5150 per-architecture data is then initialized during architecture
5151 creation.
5152
5153 In the below, the module's per-architecture @emph{nozel} is added. An
5154 architecture can specify its nozel by calling @code{set_gdbarch_nozel}
5155 from @code{gdbarch_init}.
5156
5157 @smallexample
5158 static void *
5159 nozel_pre_init (struct obstack *obstack)
5160 @{
5161 struct nozel *data = OBSTACK_ZALLOC (obstack, struct nozel);
5162 return data;
5163 @}
5164 @end smallexample
5165
5166 @smallexample
5167 extern void
5168 set_gdbarch_nozel (struct gdbarch *gdbarch, int total)
5169 @{
5170 struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
5171 data->total = nozel;
5172 @}
5173 @end smallexample
5174
5175 A module can on-demand create architecture dependant data structures
5176 using @code{post_init}.
5177
5178 In the below, the nozel's total is computed on-demand by
5179 @code{nozel_post_init} using information obtained from the
5180 architecture.
5181
5182 @smallexample
5183 static void *
5184 nozel_post_init (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
5185 @{
5186 struct nozel *data = GDBARCH_OBSTACK_ZALLOC (gdbarch, struct nozel);
5187 nozel->total = gdbarch@dots{} (gdbarch);
5188 return data;
5189 @}
5190 @end smallexample
5191
5192 @smallexample
5193 extern int
5194 nozel_total (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
5195 @{
5196 struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
5197 return data->total;
5198 @}
5199 @end smallexample
5200
5201 @section Wrapping Output Lines
5202 @cindex line wrap in output
5203
5204 @findex wrap_here
5205 Output that goes through @code{printf_filtered} or @code{fputs_filtered}
5206 or @code{fputs_demangled} needs only to have calls to @code{wrap_here}
5207 added in places that would be good breaking points. The utility
5208 routines will take care of actually wrapping if the line width is
5209 exceeded.
5210
5211 The argument to @code{wrap_here} is an indentation string which is
5212 printed @emph{only} if the line breaks there. This argument is saved
5213 away and used later. It must remain valid until the next call to
5214 @code{wrap_here} or until a newline has been printed through the
5215 @code{*_filtered} functions. Don't pass in a local variable and then
5216 return!
5217
5218 It is usually best to call @code{wrap_here} after printing a comma or
5219 space. If you call it before printing a space, make sure that your
5220 indentation properly accounts for the leading space that will print if
5221 the line wraps there.
5222
5223 Any function or set of functions that produce filtered output must
5224 finish by printing a newline, to flush the wrap buffer, before switching
5225 to unfiltered (@code{printf}) output. Symbol reading routines that
5226 print warnings are a good example.
5227
5228 @section @value{GDBN} Coding Standards
5229 @cindex coding standards
5230
5231 @value{GDBN} follows the GNU coding standards, as described in
5232 @file{etc/standards.texi}. This file is also available for anonymous
5233 FTP from GNU archive sites. @value{GDBN} takes a strict interpretation
5234 of the standard; in general, when the GNU standard recommends a practice
5235 but does not require it, @value{GDBN} requires it.
5236
5237 @value{GDBN} follows an additional set of coding standards specific to
5238 @value{GDBN}, as described in the following sections.
5239
5240
5241 @subsection ISO C
5242
5243 @value{GDBN} assumes an ISO/IEC 9899:1990 (a.k.a.@: ISO C90) compliant
5244 compiler.
5245
5246 @value{GDBN} does not assume an ISO C or POSIX compliant C library.
5247
5248
5249 @subsection Memory Management
5250
5251 @value{GDBN} does not use the functions @code{malloc}, @code{realloc},
5252 @code{calloc}, @code{free} and @code{asprintf}.
5253
5254 @value{GDBN} uses the functions @code{xmalloc}, @code{xrealloc} and
5255 @code{xcalloc} when allocating memory. Unlike @code{malloc} et.al.@:
5256 these functions do not return when the memory pool is empty. Instead,
5257 they unwind the stack using cleanups. These functions return
5258 @code{NULL} when requested to allocate a chunk of memory of size zero.
5259
5260 @emph{Pragmatics: By using these functions, the need to check every
5261 memory allocation is removed. These functions provide portable
5262 behavior.}
5263
5264 @value{GDBN} does not use the function @code{free}.
5265
5266 @value{GDBN} uses the function @code{xfree} to return memory to the
5267 memory pool. Consistent with ISO-C, this function ignores a request to
5268 free a @code{NULL} pointer.
5269
5270 @emph{Pragmatics: On some systems @code{free} fails when passed a
5271 @code{NULL} pointer.}
5272
5273 @value{GDBN} can use the non-portable function @code{alloca} for the
5274 allocation of small temporary values (such as strings).
5275
5276 @emph{Pragmatics: This function is very non-portable. Some systems
5277 restrict the memory being allocated to no more than a few kilobytes.}
5278
5279 @value{GDBN} uses the string function @code{xstrdup} and the print
5280 function @code{xstrprintf}.
5281
5282 @emph{Pragmatics: @code{asprintf} and @code{strdup} can fail. Print
5283 functions such as @code{sprintf} are very prone to buffer overflow
5284 errors.}
5285
5286
5287 @subsection Compiler Warnings
5288 @cindex compiler warnings
5289
5290 With few exceptions, developers should avoid the configuration option
5291 @samp{--disable-werror} when building @value{GDBN}. The exceptions
5292 are listed in the file @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}. The default, when
5293 building with @sc{gcc}, is @samp{--enable-werror}.
5294
5295 This option causes @value{GDBN} (when built using GCC) to be compiled
5296 with a carefully selected list of compiler warning flags. Any warnings
5297 from those flags are treated as errors.
5298
5299 The current list of warning flags includes:
5300
5301 @table @samp
5302 @item -Wall
5303 Recommended @sc{gcc} warnings.
5304
5305 @item -Wdeclaration-after-statement
5306
5307 @sc{gcc} 3.x (and later) and @sc{c99} allow declarations mixed with
5308 code, but @sc{gcc} 2.x and @sc{c89} do not.
5309
5310 @item -Wpointer-arith
5311
5312 @item -Wformat-nonliteral
5313 Non-literal format strings, with a few exceptions, are bugs - they
5314 might contain unintended user-supplied format specifiers.
5315 Since @value{GDBN} uses the @code{format printf} attribute on all
5316 @code{printf} like functions this checks not just @code{printf} calls
5317 but also calls to functions such as @code{fprintf_unfiltered}.
5318
5319 @item -Wno-pointer-sign
5320 In version 4.0, GCC began warning about pointer argument passing or
5321 assignment even when the source and destination differed only in
5322 signedness. However, most @value{GDBN} code doesn't distinguish
5323 carefully between @code{char} and @code{unsigned char}. In early 2006
5324 the @value{GDBN} developers decided correcting these warnings wasn't
5325 worth the time it would take.
5326
5327 @item -Wno-unused-parameter
5328 Due to the way that @value{GDBN} is implemented many functions have
5329 unused parameters. Consequently this warning is avoided. The macro
5330 @code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} is not used as it leads to false negatives ---
5331 it is not an error to have @code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} on a parameter that
5332 is being used.
5333
5334 @item -Wno-unused
5335 @itemx -Wno-switch
5336 @itemx -Wno-char-subscripts
5337 These are warnings which might be useful for @value{GDBN}, but are
5338 currently too noisy to enable with @samp{-Werror}.
5339
5340 @end table
5341
5342 @subsection Formatting
5343
5344 @cindex source code formatting
5345 The standard GNU recommendations for formatting must be followed
5346 strictly.
5347
5348 A function declaration should not have its name in column zero. A
5349 function definition should have its name in column zero.
5350
5351 @smallexample
5352 /* Declaration */
5353 static void foo (void);
5354 /* Definition */
5355 void
5356 foo (void)
5357 @{
5358 @}
5359 @end smallexample
5360
5361 @emph{Pragmatics: This simplifies scripting. Function definitions can
5362 be found using @samp{^function-name}.}
5363
5364 There must be a space between a function or macro name and the opening
5365 parenthesis of its argument list (except for macro definitions, as
5366 required by C). There must not be a space after an open paren/bracket
5367 or before a close paren/bracket.
5368
5369 While additional whitespace is generally helpful for reading, do not use
5370 more than one blank line to separate blocks, and avoid adding whitespace
5371 after the end of a program line (as of 1/99, some 600 lines had
5372 whitespace after the semicolon). Excess whitespace causes difficulties
5373 for @code{diff} and @code{patch} utilities.
5374
5375 Pointers are declared using the traditional K&R C style:
5376
5377 @smallexample
5378 void *foo;
5379 @end smallexample
5380
5381 @noindent
5382 and not:
5383
5384 @smallexample
5385 void * foo;
5386 void* foo;
5387 @end smallexample
5388
5389 @subsection Comments
5390
5391 @cindex comment formatting
5392 The standard GNU requirements on comments must be followed strictly.
5393
5394 Block comments must appear in the following form, with no @code{/*}- or
5395 @code{*/}-only lines, and no leading @code{*}:
5396
5397 @smallexample
5398 /* Wait for control to return from inferior to debugger. If inferior
5399 gets a signal, we may decide to start it up again instead of
5400 returning. That is why there is a loop in this function. When
5401 this function actually returns it means the inferior should be left
5402 stopped and @value{GDBN} should read more commands. */
5403 @end smallexample
5404
5405 (Note that this format is encouraged by Emacs; tabbing for a multi-line
5406 comment works correctly, and @kbd{M-q} fills the block consistently.)
5407
5408 Put a blank line between the block comments preceding function or
5409 variable definitions, and the definition itself.
5410
5411 In general, put function-body comments on lines by themselves, rather
5412 than trying to fit them into the 20 characters left at the end of a
5413 line, since either the comment or the code will inevitably get longer
5414 than will fit, and then somebody will have to move it anyhow.
5415
5416 @subsection C Usage
5417
5418 @cindex C data types
5419 Code must not depend on the sizes of C data types, the format of the
5420 host's floating point numbers, the alignment of anything, or the order
5421 of evaluation of expressions.
5422
5423 @cindex function usage
5424 Use functions freely. There are only a handful of compute-bound areas
5425 in @value{GDBN} that might be affected by the overhead of a function
5426 call, mainly in symbol reading. Most of @value{GDBN}'s performance is
5427 limited by the target interface (whether serial line or system call).
5428
5429 However, use functions with moderation. A thousand one-line functions
5430 are just as hard to understand as a single thousand-line function.
5431
5432 @emph{Macros are bad, M'kay.}
5433 (But if you have to use a macro, make sure that the macro arguments are
5434 protected with parentheses.)
5435
5436 @cindex types
5437
5438 Declarations like @samp{struct foo *} should be used in preference to
5439 declarations like @samp{typedef struct foo @{ @dots{} @} *foo_ptr}.
5440
5441
5442 @subsection Function Prototypes
5443 @cindex function prototypes
5444
5445 Prototypes must be used when both @emph{declaring} and @emph{defining}
5446 a function. Prototypes for @value{GDBN} functions must include both the
5447 argument type and name, with the name matching that used in the actual
5448 function definition.
5449
5450 All external functions should have a declaration in a header file that
5451 callers include, except for @code{_initialize_*} functions, which must
5452 be external so that @file{init.c} construction works, but shouldn't be
5453 visible to random source files.
5454
5455 Where a source file needs a forward declaration of a static function,
5456 that declaration must appear in a block near the top of the source file.
5457
5458
5459 @subsection Internal Error Recovery
5460
5461 During its execution, @value{GDBN} can encounter two types of errors.
5462 User errors and internal errors. User errors include not only a user
5463 entering an incorrect command but also problems arising from corrupt
5464 object files and system errors when interacting with the target.
5465 Internal errors include situations where @value{GDBN} has detected, at
5466 run time, a corrupt or erroneous situation.
5467
5468 When reporting an internal error, @value{GDBN} uses
5469 @code{internal_error} and @code{gdb_assert}.
5470
5471 @value{GDBN} must not call @code{abort} or @code{assert}.
5472
5473 @emph{Pragmatics: There is no @code{internal_warning} function. Either
5474 the code detected a user error, recovered from it and issued a
5475 @code{warning} or the code failed to correctly recover from the user
5476 error and issued an @code{internal_error}.}
5477
5478 @subsection File Names
5479
5480 Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be in lower
5481 case. Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be 8.3
5482 unique. These requirements apply to both source and generated files.
5483
5484 @emph{Pragmatics: The core of @value{GDBN} must be buildable on many
5485 platforms including DJGPP and MacOS/HFS. Every time an unfriendly file
5486 is introduced to the build process both @file{Makefile.in} and
5487 @file{configure.in} need to be modified accordingly. Compare the
5488 convoluted conversion process needed to transform @file{COPYING} into
5489 @file{copying.c} with the conversion needed to transform
5490 @file{version.in} into @file{version.c}.}
5491
5492 Any file non 8.3 compliant file (that is not used when building the core
5493 of @value{GDBN}) must be added to @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
5494
5495 @emph{Pragmatics: This is clearly a compromise.}
5496
5497 When @value{GDBN} has a local version of a system header file (ex
5498 @file{string.h}) the file name based on the POSIX header prefixed with
5499 @file{gdb_} (@file{gdb_string.h}). These headers should be relatively
5500 independent: they should use only macros defined by @file{configure},
5501 the compiler, or the host; they should include only system headers; they
5502 should refer only to system types. They may be shared between multiple
5503 programs, e.g.@: @value{GDBN} and @sc{gdbserver}.
5504
5505 For other files @samp{-} is used as the separator.
5506
5507
5508 @subsection Include Files
5509
5510 A @file{.c} file should include @file{defs.h} first.
5511
5512 A @file{.c} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
5513 declaration and/or definition it directly refers to. It cannot rely on
5514 indirect inclusion.
5515
5516 A @file{.h} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
5517 declaration and/or definition it directly refers to. It cannot rely on
5518 indirect inclusion. Exception: The file @file{defs.h} does not need to
5519 be directly included.
5520
5521 An external declaration should only appear in one include file.
5522
5523 An external declaration should never appear in a @code{.c} file.
5524 Exception: a declaration for the @code{_initialize} function that
5525 pacifies @option{-Wmissing-declaration}.
5526
5527 A @code{typedef} definition should only appear in one include file.
5528
5529 An opaque @code{struct} declaration can appear in multiple @file{.h}
5530 files. Where possible, a @file{.h} file should use an opaque
5531 @code{struct} declaration instead of an include.
5532
5533 All @file{.h} files should be wrapped in:
5534
5535 @smallexample
5536 #ifndef INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
5537 #define INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
5538 header body
5539 #endif
5540 @end smallexample
5541
5542
5543 @subsection Clean Design and Portable Implementation
5544
5545 @cindex design
5546 In addition to getting the syntax right, there's the little question of
5547 semantics. Some things are done in certain ways in @value{GDBN} because long
5548 experience has shown that the more obvious ways caused various kinds of
5549 trouble.
5550
5551 @cindex assumptions about targets
5552 You can't assume the byte order of anything that comes from a target
5553 (including @var{value}s, object files, and instructions). Such things
5554 must be byte-swapped using @code{SWAP_TARGET_AND_HOST} in
5555 @value{GDBN}, or one of the swap routines defined in @file{bfd.h},
5556 such as @code{bfd_get_32}.
5557
5558 You can't assume that you know what interface is being used to talk to
5559 the target system. All references to the target must go through the
5560 current @code{target_ops} vector.
5561
5562 You can't assume that the host and target machines are the same machine
5563 (except in the ``native'' support modules). In particular, you can't
5564 assume that the target machine's header files will be available on the
5565 host machine. Target code must bring along its own header files --
5566 written from scratch or explicitly donated by their owner, to avoid
5567 copyright problems.
5568
5569 @cindex portability
5570 Insertion of new @code{#ifdef}'s will be frowned upon. It's much better
5571 to write the code portably than to conditionalize it for various
5572 systems.
5573
5574 @cindex system dependencies
5575 New @code{#ifdef}'s which test for specific compilers or manufacturers
5576 or operating systems are unacceptable. All @code{#ifdef}'s should test
5577 for features. The information about which configurations contain which
5578 features should be segregated into the configuration files. Experience
5579 has proven far too often that a feature unique to one particular system
5580 often creeps into other systems; and that a conditional based on some
5581 predefined macro for your current system will become worthless over
5582 time, as new versions of your system come out that behave differently
5583 with regard to this feature.
5584
5585 Adding code that handles specific architectures, operating systems,
5586 target interfaces, or hosts, is not acceptable in generic code.
5587
5588 @cindex portable file name handling
5589 @cindex file names, portability
5590 One particularly notorious area where system dependencies tend to
5591 creep in is handling of file names. The mainline @value{GDBN} code
5592 assumes Posix semantics of file names: absolute file names begin with
5593 a forward slash @file{/}, slashes are used to separate leading
5594 directories, case-sensitive file names. These assumptions are not
5595 necessarily true on non-Posix systems such as MS-Windows. To avoid
5596 system-dependent code where you need to take apart or construct a file
5597 name, use the following portable macros:
5598
5599 @table @code
5600 @findex HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
5601 @item HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
5602 This preprocessing symbol is defined to a non-zero value on hosts
5603 whose filesystems belong to the MS-DOS/MS-Windows family. Use this
5604 symbol to write conditional code which should only be compiled for
5605 such hosts.
5606
5607 @findex IS_DIR_SEPARATOR
5608 @item IS_DIR_SEPARATOR (@var{c})
5609 Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{c} is a directory separator
5610 character. On Unix and GNU/Linux systems, only a slash @file{/} is
5611 such a character, but on Windows, both @file{/} and @file{\} will
5612 pass.
5613
5614 @findex IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH
5615 @item IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (@var{file})
5616 Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{file} is an absolute file name.
5617 For Unix and GNU/Linux hosts, a name which begins with a slash
5618 @file{/} is absolute. On DOS and Windows, @file{d:/foo} and
5619 @file{x:\bar} are also absolute file names.
5620
5621 @findex FILENAME_CMP
5622 @item FILENAME_CMP (@var{f1}, @var{f2})
5623 Calls a function which compares file names @var{f1} and @var{f2} as
5624 appropriate for the underlying host filesystem. For Posix systems,
5625 this simply calls @code{strcmp}; on case-insensitive filesystems it
5626 will call @code{strcasecmp} instead.
5627
5628 @findex DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
5629 @item DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
5630 Evaluates to a character which separates directories in
5631 @code{PATH}-style lists, typically held in environment variables.
5632 This character is @samp{:} on Unix, @samp{;} on DOS and Windows.
5633
5634 @findex SLASH_STRING
5635 @item SLASH_STRING
5636 This evaluates to a constant string you should use to produce an
5637 absolute filename from leading directories and the file's basename.
5638 @code{SLASH_STRING} is @code{"/"} on most systems, but might be
5639 @code{"\\"} for some Windows-based ports.
5640 @end table
5641
5642 In addition to using these macros, be sure to use portable library
5643 functions whenever possible. For example, to extract a directory or a
5644 basename part from a file name, use the @code{dirname} and
5645 @code{basename} library functions (available in @code{libiberty} for
5646 platforms which don't provide them), instead of searching for a slash
5647 with @code{strrchr}.
5648
5649 Another way to generalize @value{GDBN} along a particular interface is with an
5650 attribute struct. For example, @value{GDBN} has been generalized to handle
5651 multiple kinds of remote interfaces---not by @code{#ifdef}s everywhere, but
5652 by defining the @code{target_ops} structure and having a current target (as
5653 well as a stack of targets below it, for memory references). Whenever
5654 something needs to be done that depends on which remote interface we are
5655 using, a flag in the current target_ops structure is tested (e.g.,
5656 @code{target_has_stack}), or a function is called through a pointer in the
5657 current target_ops structure. In this way, when a new remote interface
5658 is added, only one module needs to be touched---the one that actually
5659 implements the new remote interface. Other examples of
5660 attribute-structs are BFD access to multiple kinds of object file
5661 formats, or @value{GDBN}'s access to multiple source languages.
5662
5663 Please avoid duplicating code. For example, in @value{GDBN} 3.x all
5664 the code interfacing between @code{ptrace} and the rest of
5665 @value{GDBN} was duplicated in @file{*-dep.c}, and so changing
5666 something was very painful. In @value{GDBN} 4.x, these have all been
5667 consolidated into @file{infptrace.c}. @file{infptrace.c} can deal
5668 with variations between systems the same way any system-independent
5669 file would (hooks, @code{#if defined}, etc.), and machines which are
5670 radically different don't need to use @file{infptrace.c} at all.
5671
5672 All debugging code must be controllable using the @samp{set debug
5673 @var{module}} command. Do not use @code{printf} to print trace
5674 messages. Use @code{fprintf_unfiltered(gdb_stdlog, ...}. Do not use
5675 @code{#ifdef DEBUG}.
5676
5677
5678 @node Porting GDB
5679
5680 @chapter Porting @value{GDBN}
5681 @cindex porting to new machines
5682
5683 Most of the work in making @value{GDBN} compile on a new machine is in
5684 specifying the configuration of the machine. This is done in a
5685 dizzying variety of header files and configuration scripts, which we
5686 hope to make more sensible soon. Let's say your new host is called an
5687 @var{xyz} (e.g., @samp{sun4}), and its full three-part configuration
5688 name is @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}} (e.g.,
5689 @samp{sparc-sun-sunos4}). In particular:
5690
5691 @itemize @bullet
5692 @item
5693 In the top level directory, edit @file{config.sub} and add @var{arch},
5694 @var{xvend}, and @var{xos} to the lists of supported architectures,
5695 vendors, and operating systems near the bottom of the file. Also, add
5696 @var{xyz} as an alias that maps to
5697 @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}}. You can test your changes by
5698 running
5699
5700 @smallexample
5701 ./config.sub @var{xyz}
5702 @end smallexample
5703
5704 @noindent
5705 and
5706
5707 @smallexample
5708 ./config.sub @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}}
5709 @end smallexample
5710
5711 @noindent
5712 which should both respond with @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}}
5713 and no error messages.
5714
5715 @noindent
5716 You need to port BFD, if that hasn't been done already. Porting BFD is
5717 beyond the scope of this manual.
5718
5719 @item
5720 To configure @value{GDBN} itself, edit @file{gdb/configure.host} to recognize
5721 your system and set @code{gdb_host} to @var{xyz}, and (unless your
5722 desired target is already available) also edit @file{gdb/configure.tgt},
5723 setting @code{gdb_target} to something appropriate (for instance,
5724 @var{xyz}).
5725
5726 @emph{Maintainer's note: Work in progress. The file
5727 @file{gdb/configure.host} originally needed to be modified when either a
5728 new native target or a new host machine was being added to @value{GDBN}.
5729 Recent changes have removed this requirement. The file now only needs
5730 to be modified when adding a new native configuration. This will likely
5731 changed again in the future.}
5732
5733 @item
5734 Finally, you'll need to specify and define @value{GDBN}'s host-, native-, and
5735 target-dependent @file{.h} and @file{.c} files used for your
5736 configuration.
5737 @end itemize
5738
5739 @node Versions and Branches
5740 @chapter Versions and Branches
5741
5742 @section Versions
5743
5744 @value{GDBN}'s version is determined by the file
5745 @file{gdb/version.in} and takes one of the following forms:
5746
5747 @table @asis
5748 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}
5749 @itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}
5750 an official release (e.g., 6.2 or 6.2.1)
5751 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5752 a snapshot taken at @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD}-gmt (e.g.,
5753 6.1.50.20020302, 6.1.90.20020304, or 6.1.0.20020308)
5754 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-cvs
5755 a @sc{cvs} check out drawn on @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD} (e.g.,
5756 6.1.50.20020302-cvs, 6.1.90.20020304-cvs, or 6.1.0.20020308-cvs)
5757 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} (@var{vendor})
5758 a vendor specific release of @value{GDBN}, that while based on@*
5759 @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD},
5760 may include additional changes
5761 @end table
5762
5763 @value{GDBN}'s mainline uses the @var{major} and @var{minor} version
5764 numbers from the most recent release branch, with a @var{patchlevel}
5765 of 50. At the time each new release branch is created, the mainline's
5766 @var{major} and @var{minor} version numbers are updated.
5767
5768 @value{GDBN}'s release branch is similar. When the branch is cut, the
5769 @var{patchlevel} is changed from 50 to 90. As draft releases are
5770 drawn from the branch, the @var{patchlevel} is incremented. Once the
5771 first release (@var{major}.@var{minor}) has been made, the
5772 @var{patchlevel} is set to 0 and updates have an incremented
5773 @var{patchlevel}.
5774
5775 For snapshots, and @sc{cvs} check outs, it is also possible to
5776 identify the @sc{cvs} origin:
5777
5778 @table @asis
5779 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.50.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5780 drawn from the @sc{head} of mainline @sc{cvs} (e.g., 6.1.50.20020302)
5781 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.90.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5782 @itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.91.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
5783 drawn from a release branch prior to the release (e.g.,
5784 6.1.90.20020304)
5785 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.0.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5786 @itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.1.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
5787 drawn from a release branch after the release (e.g., 6.2.0.20020308)
5788 @end table
5789
5790 If the previous @value{GDBN} version is 6.1 and the current version is
5791 6.2, then, substituting 6 for @var{major} and 1 or 2 for @var{minor},
5792 here's an illustration of a typical sequence:
5793
5794 @smallexample
5795 <HEAD>
5796 |
5797 6.1.50.20020302-cvs
5798 |
5799 +--------------------------.
5800 | <gdb_6_2-branch>
5801 | |
5802 6.2.50.20020303-cvs 6.1.90 (draft #1)
5803 | |
5804 6.2.50.20020304-cvs 6.1.90.20020304-cvs
5805 | |
5806 6.2.50.20020305-cvs 6.1.91 (draft #2)
5807 | |
5808 6.2.50.20020306-cvs 6.1.91.20020306-cvs
5809 | |
5810 6.2.50.20020307-cvs 6.2 (release)
5811 | |
5812 6.2.50.20020308-cvs 6.2.0.20020308-cvs
5813 | |
5814 6.2.50.20020309-cvs 6.2.1 (update)
5815 | |
5816 6.2.50.20020310-cvs <branch closed>
5817 |
5818 6.2.50.20020311-cvs
5819 |
5820 +--------------------------.
5821 | <gdb_6_3-branch>
5822 | |
5823 6.3.50.20020312-cvs 6.2.90 (draft #1)
5824 | |
5825 @end smallexample
5826
5827 @section Release Branches
5828 @cindex Release Branches
5829
5830 @value{GDBN} draws a release series (6.2, 6.2.1, @dots{}) from a
5831 single release branch, and identifies that branch using the @sc{cvs}
5832 branch tags:
5833
5834 @smallexample
5835 gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-branchpoint
5836 gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-branch
5837 gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-release
5838 @end smallexample
5839
5840 @emph{Pragmatics: To help identify the date at which a branch or
5841 release is made, both the branchpoint and release tags include the
5842 date that they are cut (@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}) in the tag. The
5843 branch tag, denoting the head of the branch, does not need this.}
5844
5845 @section Vendor Branches
5846 @cindex vendor branches
5847
5848 To avoid version conflicts, vendors are expected to modify the file
5849 @file{gdb/version.in} to include a vendor unique alphabetic identifier
5850 (an official @value{GDBN} release never uses alphabetic characters in
5851 its version identifier). E.g., @samp{6.2widgit2}, or @samp{6.2 (Widgit
5852 Inc Patch 2)}.
5853
5854 @section Experimental Branches
5855 @cindex experimental branches
5856
5857 @subsection Guidelines
5858
5859 @value{GDBN} permits the creation of branches, cut from the @sc{cvs}
5860 repository, for experimental development. Branches make it possible
5861 for developers to share preliminary work, and maintainers to examine
5862 significant new developments.
5863
5864 The following are a set of guidelines for creating such branches:
5865
5866 @table @emph
5867
5868 @item a branch has an owner
5869 The owner can set further policy for a branch, but may not change the
5870 ground rules. In particular, they can set a policy for commits (be it
5871 adding more reviewers or deciding who can commit).
5872
5873 @item all commits are posted
5874 All changes committed to a branch shall also be posted to
5875 @email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com, the @value{GDBN} patches
5876 mailing list}. While commentary on such changes are encouraged, people
5877 should remember that the changes only apply to a branch.
5878
5879 @item all commits are covered by an assignment
5880 This ensures that all changes belong to the Free Software Foundation,
5881 and avoids the possibility that the branch may become contaminated.
5882
5883 @item a branch is focused
5884 A focused branch has a single objective or goal, and does not contain
5885 unnecessary or irrelevant changes. Cleanups, where identified, being
5886 be pushed into the mainline as soon as possible.
5887
5888 @item a branch tracks mainline
5889 This keeps the level of divergence under control. It also keeps the
5890 pressure on developers to push cleanups and other stuff into the
5891 mainline.
5892
5893 @item a branch shall contain the entire @value{GDBN} module
5894 The @value{GDBN} module @code{gdb} should be specified when creating a
5895 branch (branches of individual files should be avoided). @xref{Tags}.
5896
5897 @item a branch shall be branded using @file{version.in}
5898 The file @file{gdb/version.in} shall be modified so that it identifies
5899 the branch @var{owner} and branch @var{name}, e.g.,
5900 @samp{6.2.50.20030303_owner_name} or @samp{6.2 (Owner Name)}.
5901
5902 @end table
5903
5904 @subsection Tags
5905 @anchor{Tags}
5906
5907 To simplify the identification of @value{GDBN} branches, the following
5908 branch tagging convention is strongly recommended:
5909
5910 @table @code
5911
5912 @item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
5913 @itemx @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch
5914 The branch point and corresponding branch tag. @var{YYYYMMDD} is the
5915 date that the branch was created. A branch is created using the
5916 sequence: @anchor{experimental branch tags}
5917 @smallexample
5918 cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint gdb
5919 cvs rtag -b -r @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint \
5920 @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch gdb
5921 @end smallexample
5922
5923 @item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
5924 The tagged point, on the mainline, that was used when merging the branch
5925 on @var{yyyymmdd}. To merge in all changes since the branch was cut,
5926 use a command sequence like:
5927 @smallexample
5928 cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint gdb
5929 cvs update \
5930 -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
5931 -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
5932 @end smallexample
5933 @noindent
5934 Similar sequences can be used to just merge in changes since the last
5935 merge.
5936
5937 @end table
5938
5939 @noindent
5940 For further information on @sc{cvs}, see
5941 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/cvs/, Concurrent Versions System}.
5942
5943 @node Start of New Year Procedure
5944 @chapter Start of New Year Procedure
5945 @cindex new year procedure
5946
5947 At the start of each new year, the following actions should be performed:
5948
5949 @itemize @bullet
5950 @item
5951 Rotate the ChangeLog file
5952
5953 The current @file{ChangeLog} file should be renamed into
5954 @file{ChangeLog-YYYY} where YYYY is the year that has just passed.
5955 A new @file{ChangeLog} file should be created, and its contents should
5956 contain a reference to the previous ChangeLog. The following should
5957 also be preserved at the end of the new ChangeLog, in order to provide
5958 the appropriate settings when editing this file with Emacs:
5959 @smallexample
5960 Local Variables:
5961 mode: change-log
5962 left-margin: 8
5963 fill-column: 74
5964 version-control: never
5965 End:
5966 @end smallexample
5967
5968 @item
5969 Add an entry for the newly created ChangeLog file (@file{ChangeLog-YYYY})
5970 in @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
5971
5972 @item
5973 Update the copyright year in the startup message
5974
5975 Update the copyright year in file @file{top.c}, function
5976 @code{print_gdb_version}.
5977 @end itemize
5978
5979 @node Releasing GDB
5980
5981 @chapter Releasing @value{GDBN}
5982 @cindex making a new release of gdb
5983
5984 @section Branch Commit Policy
5985
5986 The branch commit policy is pretty slack. @value{GDBN} releases 5.0,
5987 5.1 and 5.2 all used the below:
5988
5989 @itemize @bullet
5990 @item
5991 The @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS} file still holds.
5992 @item
5993 Don't fix something on the branch unless/until it is also fixed in the
5994 trunk. If this isn't possible, mentioning it in the @file{gdb/PROBLEMS}
5995 file is better than committing a hack.
5996 @item
5997 When considering a patch for the branch, suggested criteria include:
5998 Does it fix a build? Does it fix the sequence @kbd{break main; run}
5999 when debugging a static binary?
6000 @item
6001 The further a change is from the core of @value{GDBN}, the less likely
6002 the change will worry anyone (e.g., target specific code).
6003 @item
6004 Only post a proposal to change the core of @value{GDBN} after you've
6005 sent individual bribes to all the people listed in the
6006 @file{MAINTAINERS} file @t{;-)}
6007 @end itemize
6008
6009 @emph{Pragmatics: Provided updates are restricted to non-core
6010 functionality there is little chance that a broken change will be fatal.
6011 This means that changes such as adding a new architectures or (within
6012 reason) support for a new host are considered acceptable.}
6013
6014
6015 @section Obsoleting code
6016
6017 Before anything else, poke the other developers (and around the source
6018 code) to see if there is anything that can be removed from @value{GDBN}
6019 (an old target, an unused file).
6020
6021 Obsolete code is identified by adding an @code{OBSOLETE} prefix to every
6022 line. Doing this means that it is easy to identify something that has
6023 been obsoleted when greping through the sources.
6024
6025 The process is done in stages --- this is mainly to ensure that the
6026 wider @value{GDBN} community has a reasonable opportunity to respond.
6027 Remember, everything on the Internet takes a week.
6028
6029 @enumerate
6030 @item
6031 Post the proposal on @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, the GDB mailing
6032 list} Creating a bug report to track the task's state, is also highly
6033 recommended.
6034 @item
6035 Wait a week or so.
6036 @item
6037 Post the proposal on @email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, the GDB
6038 Announcement mailing list}.
6039 @item
6040 Wait a week or so.
6041 @item
6042 Go through and edit all relevant files and lines so that they are
6043 prefixed with the word @code{OBSOLETE}.
6044 @item
6045 Wait until the next GDB version, containing this obsolete code, has been
6046 released.
6047 @item
6048 Remove the obsolete code.
6049 @end enumerate
6050
6051 @noindent
6052 @emph{Maintainer note: While removing old code is regrettable it is
6053 hopefully better for @value{GDBN}'s long term development. Firstly it
6054 helps the developers by removing code that is either no longer relevant
6055 or simply wrong. Secondly since it removes any history associated with
6056 the file (effectively clearing the slate) the developer has a much freer
6057 hand when it comes to fixing broken files.}
6058
6059
6060
6061 @section Before the Branch
6062
6063 The most important objective at this stage is to find and fix simple
6064 changes that become a pain to track once the branch is created. For
6065 instance, configuration problems that stop @value{GDBN} from even
6066 building. If you can't get the problem fixed, document it in the
6067 @file{gdb/PROBLEMS} file.
6068
6069 @subheading Prompt for @file{gdb/NEWS}
6070
6071 People always forget. Send a post reminding them but also if you know
6072 something interesting happened add it yourself. The @code{schedule}
6073 script will mention this in its e-mail.
6074
6075 @subheading Review @file{gdb/README}
6076
6077 Grab one of the nightly snapshots and then walk through the
6078 @file{gdb/README} looking for anything that can be improved. The
6079 @code{schedule} script will mention this in its e-mail.
6080
6081 @subheading Refresh any imported files.
6082
6083 A number of files are taken from external repositories. They include:
6084
6085 @itemize @bullet
6086 @item
6087 @file{texinfo/texinfo.tex}
6088 @item
6089 @file{config.guess} et.@: al.@: (see the top-level @file{MAINTAINERS}
6090 file)
6091 @item
6092 @file{etc/standards.texi}, @file{etc/make-stds.texi}
6093 @end itemize
6094
6095 @subheading Check the ARI
6096
6097 @uref{http://sources.redhat.com/gdb/ari,,A.R.I.} is an @code{awk} script
6098 (Awk Regression Index ;-) that checks for a number of errors and coding
6099 conventions. The checks include things like using @code{malloc} instead
6100 of @code{xmalloc} and file naming problems. There shouldn't be any
6101 regressions.
6102
6103 @subsection Review the bug data base
6104
6105 Close anything obviously fixed.
6106
6107 @subsection Check all cross targets build
6108
6109 The targets are listed in @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}.
6110
6111
6112 @section Cut the Branch
6113
6114 @subheading Create the branch
6115
6116 @smallexample
6117 $ u=5.1
6118 $ v=5.2
6119 $ V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
6120 $ D=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
6121 $ echo $u $V $D
6122 5.1 5_2 2002-03-03
6123 $ echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6124 -D $D-gmt gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint insight
6125 cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag
6126 -D 2002-03-03-gmt gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint insight
6127 $ ^echo ^^
6128 ...
6129 $ echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6130 -b -r gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint gdb_$V-branch insight
6131 cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6132 -b -r gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint gdb_5_2-branch insight
6133 $ ^echo ^^
6134 ...
6135 $
6136 @end smallexample
6137
6138 @itemize @bullet
6139 @item
6140 By using @kbd{-D YYYY-MM-DD-gmt}, the branch is forced to an exact
6141 date/time.
6142 @item
6143 The trunk is first tagged so that the branch point can easily be found.
6144 @item
6145 Insight, which includes @value{GDBN}, is tagged at the same time.
6146 @item
6147 @file{version.in} gets bumped to avoid version number conflicts.
6148 @item
6149 The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled using @file{-f}.
6150 @end itemize
6151
6152 @subheading Update @file{version.in}
6153
6154 @smallexample
6155 $ u=5.1
6156 $ v=5.2
6157 $ V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
6158 $ echo $u $v$V
6159 5.1 5_2
6160 $ cd /tmp
6161 $ echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src co \
6162 -r gdb_$V-branch src/gdb/version.in
6163 cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src co
6164 -r gdb_5_2-branch src/gdb/version.in
6165 $ ^echo ^^
6166 U src/gdb/version.in
6167 $ cd src/gdb
6168 $ echo $u.90-0000-00-00-cvs > version.in
6169 $ cat version.in
6170 5.1.90-0000-00-00-cvs
6171 $ cvs -f commit version.in
6172 @end smallexample
6173
6174 @itemize @bullet
6175 @item
6176 @file{0000-00-00} is used as a date to pump prime the version.in update
6177 mechanism.
6178 @item
6179 @file{.90} and the previous branch version are used as fairly arbitrary
6180 initial branch version number.
6181 @end itemize
6182
6183
6184 @subheading Update the web and news pages
6185
6186 Something?
6187
6188 @subheading Tweak cron to track the new branch
6189
6190 The file @file{gdbadmin/cron/crontab} contains gdbadmin's cron table.
6191 This file needs to be updated so that:
6192
6193 @itemize @bullet
6194 @item
6195 A daily timestamp is added to the file @file{version.in}.
6196 @item
6197 The new branch is included in the snapshot process.
6198 @end itemize
6199
6200 @noindent
6201 See the file @file{gdbadmin/cron/README} for how to install the updated
6202 cron table.
6203
6204 The file @file{gdbadmin/ss/README} should also be reviewed to reflect
6205 any changes. That file is copied to both the branch/ and current/
6206 snapshot directories.
6207
6208
6209 @subheading Update the NEWS and README files
6210
6211 The @file{NEWS} file needs to be updated so that on the branch it refers
6212 to @emph{changes in the current release} while on the trunk it also
6213 refers to @emph{changes since the current release}.
6214
6215 The @file{README} file needs to be updated so that it refers to the
6216 current release.
6217
6218 @subheading Post the branch info
6219
6220 Send an announcement to the mailing lists:
6221
6222 @itemize @bullet
6223 @item
6224 @email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Announcement mailing list}
6225 @item
6226 @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Discussion mailing list} and
6227 @email{gdb-testers@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Testers mailing list}
6228 @end itemize
6229
6230 @emph{Pragmatics: The branch creation is sent to the announce list to
6231 ensure that people people not subscribed to the higher volume discussion
6232 list are alerted.}
6233
6234 The announcement should include:
6235
6236 @itemize @bullet
6237 @item
6238 The branch tag.
6239 @item
6240 How to check out the branch using CVS.
6241 @item
6242 The date/number of weeks until the release.
6243 @item
6244 The branch commit policy still holds.
6245 @end itemize
6246
6247 @section Stabilize the branch
6248
6249 Something goes here.
6250
6251 @section Create a Release
6252
6253 The process of creating and then making available a release is broken
6254 down into a number of stages. The first part addresses the technical
6255 process of creating a releasable tar ball. The later stages address the
6256 process of releasing that tar ball.
6257
6258 When making a release candidate just the first section is needed.
6259
6260 @subsection Create a release candidate
6261
6262 The objective at this stage is to create a set of tar balls that can be
6263 made available as a formal release (or as a less formal release
6264 candidate).
6265
6266 @subsubheading Freeze the branch
6267
6268 Send out an e-mail notifying everyone that the branch is frozen to
6269 @email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com}.
6270
6271 @subsubheading Establish a few defaults.
6272
6273 @smallexample
6274 $ b=gdb_5_2-branch
6275 $ v=5.2
6276 $ t=/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp
6277 $ echo $t/$b/$v
6278 /sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
6279 $ mkdir -p $t/$b/$v
6280 $ cd $t/$b/$v
6281 $ pwd
6282 /sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
6283 $ which autoconf
6284 /home/gdbadmin/bin/autoconf
6285 $
6286 @end smallexample
6287
6288 @noindent
6289 Notes:
6290
6291 @itemize @bullet
6292 @item
6293 Check the @code{autoconf} version carefully. You want to be using the
6294 version taken from the @file{binutils} snapshot directory, which can be
6295 found at @uref{ftp://sources.redhat.com/pub/binutils/}. It is very
6296 unlikely that a system installed version of @code{autoconf} (e.g.,
6297 @file{/usr/bin/autoconf}) is correct.
6298 @end itemize
6299
6300 @subsubheading Check out the relevant modules:
6301
6302 @smallexample
6303 $ for m in gdb insight
6304 do
6305 ( mkdir -p $m && cd $m && cvs -q -f -d /cvs/src co -P -r $b $m )
6306 done
6307 $
6308 @end smallexample
6309
6310 @noindent
6311 Note:
6312
6313 @itemize @bullet
6314 @item
6315 The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled (@file{-f}) so that there isn't
6316 any confusion between what is written here and what your local
6317 @code{cvs} really does.
6318 @end itemize
6319
6320 @subsubheading Update relevant files.
6321
6322 @table @file
6323
6324 @item gdb/NEWS
6325
6326 Major releases get their comments added as part of the mainline. Minor
6327 releases should probably mention any significant bugs that were fixed.
6328
6329 Don't forget to include the @file{ChangeLog} entry.
6330
6331 @smallexample
6332 $ emacs gdb/src/gdb/NEWS
6333 ...
6334 c-x 4 a
6335 ...
6336 c-x c-s c-x c-c
6337 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/NEWS insight/src/gdb/NEWS
6338 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
6339 @end smallexample
6340
6341 @item gdb/README
6342
6343 You'll need to update:
6344
6345 @itemize @bullet
6346 @item
6347 The version.
6348 @item
6349 The update date.
6350 @item
6351 Who did it.
6352 @end itemize
6353
6354 @smallexample
6355 $ emacs gdb/src/gdb/README
6356 ...
6357 c-x 4 a
6358 ...
6359 c-x c-s c-x c-c
6360 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/README insight/src/gdb/README
6361 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
6362 @end smallexample
6363
6364 @emph{Maintainer note: Hopefully the @file{README} file was reviewed
6365 before the initial branch was cut so just a simple substitute is needed
6366 to get it updated.}
6367
6368 @emph{Maintainer note: Other projects generate @file{README} and
6369 @file{INSTALL} from the core documentation. This might be worth
6370 pursuing.}
6371
6372 @item gdb/version.in
6373
6374 @smallexample
6375 $ echo $v > gdb/src/gdb/version.in
6376 $ cat gdb/src/gdb/version.in
6377 5.2
6378 $ emacs gdb/src/gdb/version.in
6379 ...
6380 c-x 4 a
6381 ... Bump to version ...
6382 c-x c-s c-x c-c
6383 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/version.in insight/src/gdb/version.in
6384 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
6385 @end smallexample
6386
6387 @end table
6388
6389 @subsubheading Do the dirty work
6390
6391 This is identical to the process used to create the daily snapshot.
6392
6393 @smallexample
6394 $ for m in gdb insight
6395 do
6396 ( cd $m/src && gmake -f src-release $m.tar )
6397 done
6398 @end smallexample
6399
6400 If the top level source directory does not have @file{src-release}
6401 (@value{GDBN} version 5.3.1 or earlier), try these commands instead:
6402
6403 @smallexample
6404 $ for m in gdb insight
6405 do
6406 ( cd $m/src && gmake -f Makefile.in $m.tar )
6407 done
6408 @end smallexample
6409
6410 @subsubheading Check the source files
6411
6412 You're looking for files that have mysteriously disappeared.
6413 @kbd{distclean} has the habit of deleting files it shouldn't. Watch out
6414 for the @file{version.in} update @kbd{cronjob}.
6415
6416 @smallexample
6417 $ ( cd gdb/src && cvs -f -q -n update )
6418 M djunpack.bat
6419 ? gdb-5.1.91.tar
6420 ? proto-toplev
6421 @dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
6422 M gdb/ChangeLog
6423 M gdb/NEWS
6424 M gdb/README
6425 M gdb/version.in
6426 @dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
6427 $
6428 @end smallexample
6429
6430 @noindent
6431 @emph{Don't worry about the @file{gdb.info-??} or
6432 @file{gdb/p-exp.tab.c}. They were generated (and yes @file{gdb.info-1}
6433 was also generated only something strange with CVS means that they
6434 didn't get suppressed). Fixing it would be nice though.}
6435
6436 @subsubheading Create compressed versions of the release
6437
6438 @smallexample
6439 $ cp */src/*.tar .
6440 $ cp */src/*.bz2 .
6441 $ ls -F
6442 gdb/ gdb-5.2.tar insight/ insight-5.2.tar
6443 $ for m in gdb insight
6444 do
6445 bzip2 -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.bz2
6446 gzip -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.gz
6447 done
6448 $
6449 @end smallexample
6450
6451 @noindent
6452 Note:
6453
6454 @itemize @bullet
6455 @item
6456 A pipe such as @kbd{bunzip2 < xxx.bz2 | gzip -9 > xxx.gz} is not since,
6457 in that mode, @code{gzip} does not know the name of the file and, hence,
6458 can not include it in the compressed file. This is also why the release
6459 process runs @code{tar} and @code{bzip2} as separate passes.
6460 @end itemize
6461
6462 @subsection Sanity check the tar ball
6463
6464 Pick a popular machine (Solaris/PPC?) and try the build on that.
6465
6466 @smallexample
6467 $ bunzip2 < gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 | tar xpf -
6468 $ cd gdb-5.2
6469 $ ./configure
6470 $ make
6471 @dots{}
6472 $ ./gdb/gdb ./gdb/gdb
6473 GNU gdb 5.2
6474 @dots{}
6475 (gdb) b main
6476 Breakpoint 1 at 0x80732bc: file main.c, line 734.
6477 (gdb) run
6478 Starting program: /tmp/gdb-5.2/gdb/gdb
6479
6480 Breakpoint 1, main (argc=1, argv=0xbffff8b4) at main.c:734
6481 734 catch_errors (captured_main, &args, "", RETURN_MASK_ALL);
6482 (gdb) print args
6483 $1 = @{argc = 136426532, argv = 0x821b7f0@}
6484 (gdb)
6485 @end smallexample
6486
6487 @subsection Make a release candidate available
6488
6489 If this is a release candidate then the only remaining steps are:
6490
6491 @enumerate
6492 @item
6493 Commit @file{version.in} and @file{ChangeLog}
6494 @item
6495 Tweak @file{version.in} (and @file{ChangeLog} to read
6496 @var{L}.@var{M}.@var{N}-0000-00-00-cvs so that the version update
6497 process can restart.
6498 @item
6499 Make the release candidate available in
6500 @uref{ftp://sources.redhat.com/pub/gdb/snapshots/branch}
6501 @item
6502 Notify the relevant mailing lists ( @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com} and
6503 @email{gdb-testers@@sources.redhat.com} that the candidate is available.
6504 @end enumerate
6505
6506 @subsection Make a formal release available
6507
6508 (And you thought all that was required was to post an e-mail.)
6509
6510 @subsubheading Install on sware
6511
6512 Copy the new files to both the release and the old release directory:
6513
6514 @smallexample
6515 $ cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/old-releases/
6516 $ cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
6517 @end smallexample
6518
6519 @noindent
6520 Clean up the releases directory so that only the most recent releases
6521 are available (e.g. keep 5.2 and 5.2.1 but remove 5.1):
6522
6523 @smallexample
6524 $ cd ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
6525 $ rm @dots{}
6526 @end smallexample
6527
6528 @noindent
6529 Update the file @file{README} and @file{.message} in the releases
6530 directory:
6531
6532 @smallexample
6533 $ vi README
6534 @dots{}
6535 $ rm -f .message
6536 $ ln README .message
6537 @end smallexample
6538
6539 @subsubheading Update the web pages.
6540
6541 @table @file
6542
6543 @item htdocs/download/ANNOUNCEMENT
6544 This file, which is posted as the official announcement, includes:
6545 @itemize @bullet
6546 @item
6547 General announcement.
6548 @item
6549 News. If making an @var{M}.@var{N}.1 release, retain the news from
6550 earlier @var{M}.@var{N} release.
6551 @item
6552 Errata.
6553 @end itemize
6554
6555 @item htdocs/index.html
6556 @itemx htdocs/news/index.html
6557 @itemx htdocs/download/index.html
6558 These files include:
6559 @itemize @bullet
6560 @item
6561 Announcement of the most recent release.
6562 @item
6563 News entry (remember to update both the top level and the news directory).
6564 @end itemize
6565 These pages also need to be regenerate using @code{index.sh}.
6566
6567 @item download/onlinedocs/
6568 You need to find the magic command that is used to generate the online
6569 docs from the @file{.tar.bz2}. The best way is to look in the output
6570 from one of the nightly @code{cron} jobs and then just edit accordingly.
6571 Something like:
6572
6573 @smallexample
6574 $ ~/ss/update-web-docs \
6575 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
6576 $PWD/www \
6577 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/onlinedocs \
6578 gdb
6579 @end smallexample
6580
6581 @item download/ari/
6582 Just like the online documentation. Something like:
6583
6584 @smallexample
6585 $ /bin/sh ~/ss/update-web-ari \
6586 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
6587 $PWD/www \
6588 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/ari \
6589 gdb
6590 @end smallexample
6591
6592 @end table
6593
6594 @subsubheading Shadow the pages onto gnu
6595
6596 Something goes here.
6597
6598
6599 @subsubheading Install the @value{GDBN} tar ball on GNU
6600
6601 At the time of writing, the GNU machine was @kbd{gnudist.gnu.org} in
6602 @file{~ftp/gnu/gdb}.
6603
6604 @subsubheading Make the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT}
6605
6606 Post the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT} file you created above to:
6607
6608 @itemize @bullet
6609 @item
6610 @email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Announcement mailing list}
6611 @item
6612 @email{info-gnu@@gnu.org, General GNU Announcement list} (but delay it a
6613 day or so to let things get out)
6614 @item
6615 @email{bug-gdb@@gnu.org, GDB Bug Report mailing list}
6616 @end itemize
6617
6618 @subsection Cleanup
6619
6620 The release is out but you're still not finished.
6621
6622 @subsubheading Commit outstanding changes
6623
6624 In particular you'll need to commit any changes to:
6625
6626 @itemize @bullet
6627 @item
6628 @file{gdb/ChangeLog}
6629 @item
6630 @file{gdb/version.in}
6631 @item
6632 @file{gdb/NEWS}
6633 @item
6634 @file{gdb/README}
6635 @end itemize
6636
6637 @subsubheading Tag the release
6638
6639 Something like:
6640
6641 @smallexample
6642 $ d=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
6643 $ echo $d
6644 2002-01-24
6645 $ ( cd insight/src/gdb && cvs -f -q update )
6646 $ ( cd insight/src && cvs -f -q tag gdb_5_2-$d-release )
6647 @end smallexample
6648
6649 Insight is used since that contains more of the release than
6650 @value{GDBN}.
6651
6652 @subsubheading Mention the release on the trunk
6653
6654 Just put something in the @file{ChangeLog} so that the trunk also
6655 indicates when the release was made.
6656
6657 @subsubheading Restart @file{gdb/version.in}
6658
6659 If @file{gdb/version.in} does not contain an ISO date such as
6660 @kbd{2002-01-24} then the daily @code{cronjob} won't update it. Having
6661 committed all the release changes it can be set to
6662 @file{5.2.0_0000-00-00-cvs} which will restart things (yes the @kbd{_}
6663 is important - it affects the snapshot process).
6664
6665 Don't forget the @file{ChangeLog}.
6666
6667 @subsubheading Merge into trunk
6668
6669 The files committed to the branch may also need changes merged into the
6670 trunk.
6671
6672 @subsubheading Revise the release schedule
6673
6674 Post a revised release schedule to @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, GDB
6675 Discussion List} with an updated announcement. The schedule can be
6676 generated by running:
6677
6678 @smallexample
6679 $ ~/ss/schedule `date +%s` schedule
6680 @end smallexample
6681
6682 @noindent
6683 The first parameter is approximate date/time in seconds (from the epoch)
6684 of the most recent release.
6685
6686 Also update the schedule @code{cronjob}.
6687
6688 @section Post release
6689
6690 Remove any @code{OBSOLETE} code.
6691
6692 @node Testsuite
6693
6694 @chapter Testsuite
6695 @cindex test suite
6696
6697 The testsuite is an important component of the @value{GDBN} package.
6698 While it is always worthwhile to encourage user testing, in practice
6699 this is rarely sufficient; users typically use only a small subset of
6700 the available commands, and it has proven all too common for a change
6701 to cause a significant regression that went unnoticed for some time.
6702
6703 The @value{GDBN} testsuite uses the DejaGNU testing framework. The
6704 tests themselves are calls to various @code{Tcl} procs; the framework
6705 runs all the procs and summarizes the passes and fails.
6706
6707 @section Using the Testsuite
6708
6709 @cindex running the test suite
6710 To run the testsuite, simply go to the @value{GDBN} object directory (or to the
6711 testsuite's objdir) and type @code{make check}. This just sets up some
6712 environment variables and invokes DejaGNU's @code{runtest} script. While
6713 the testsuite is running, you'll get mentions of which test file is in use,
6714 and a mention of any unexpected passes or fails. When the testsuite is
6715 finished, you'll get a summary that looks like this:
6716
6717 @smallexample
6718 === gdb Summary ===
6719
6720 # of expected passes 6016
6721 # of unexpected failures 58
6722 # of unexpected successes 5
6723 # of expected failures 183
6724 # of unresolved testcases 3
6725 # of untested testcases 5
6726 @end smallexample
6727
6728 To run a specific test script, type:
6729 @example
6730 make check RUNTESTFLAGS='@var{tests}'
6731 @end example
6732 where @var{tests} is a list of test script file names, separated by
6733 spaces.
6734
6735 The ideal test run consists of expected passes only; however, reality
6736 conspires to keep us from this ideal. Unexpected failures indicate
6737 real problems, whether in @value{GDBN} or in the testsuite. Expected
6738 failures are still failures, but ones which have been decided are too
6739 hard to deal with at the time; for instance, a test case might work
6740 everywhere except on AIX, and there is no prospect of the AIX case
6741 being fixed in the near future. Expected failures should not be added
6742 lightly, since you may be masking serious bugs in @value{GDBN}.
6743 Unexpected successes are expected fails that are passing for some
6744 reason, while unresolved and untested cases often indicate some minor
6745 catastrophe, such as the compiler being unable to deal with a test
6746 program.
6747
6748 When making any significant change to @value{GDBN}, you should run the
6749 testsuite before and after the change, to confirm that there are no
6750 regressions. Note that truly complete testing would require that you
6751 run the testsuite with all supported configurations and a variety of
6752 compilers; however this is more than really necessary. In many cases
6753 testing with a single configuration is sufficient. Other useful
6754 options are to test one big-endian (Sparc) and one little-endian (x86)
6755 host, a cross config with a builtin simulator (powerpc-eabi,
6756 mips-elf), or a 64-bit host (Alpha).
6757
6758 If you add new functionality to @value{GDBN}, please consider adding
6759 tests for it as well; this way future @value{GDBN} hackers can detect
6760 and fix their changes that break the functionality you added.
6761 Similarly, if you fix a bug that was not previously reported as a test
6762 failure, please add a test case for it. Some cases are extremely
6763 difficult to test, such as code that handles host OS failures or bugs
6764 in particular versions of compilers, and it's OK not to try to write
6765 tests for all of those.
6766
6767 DejaGNU supports separate build, host, and target machines. However,
6768 some @value{GDBN} test scripts do not work if the build machine and
6769 the host machine are not the same. In such an environment, these scripts
6770 will give a result of ``UNRESOLVED'', like this:
6771
6772 @smallexample
6773 UNRESOLVED: gdb.base/example.exp: This test script does not work on a remote host.
6774 @end smallexample
6775
6776 @section Testsuite Organization
6777
6778 @cindex test suite organization
6779 The testsuite is entirely contained in @file{gdb/testsuite}. While the
6780 testsuite includes some makefiles and configury, these are very minimal,
6781 and used for little besides cleaning up, since the tests themselves
6782 handle the compilation of the programs that @value{GDBN} will run. The file
6783 @file{testsuite/lib/gdb.exp} contains common utility procs useful for
6784 all @value{GDBN} tests, while the directory @file{testsuite/config} contains
6785 configuration-specific files, typically used for special-purpose
6786 definitions of procs like @code{gdb_load} and @code{gdb_start}.
6787
6788 The tests themselves are to be found in @file{testsuite/gdb.*} and
6789 subdirectories of those. The names of the test files must always end
6790 with @file{.exp}. DejaGNU collects the test files by wildcarding
6791 in the test directories, so both subdirectories and individual files
6792 get chosen and run in alphabetical order.
6793
6794 The following table lists the main types of subdirectories and what they
6795 are for. Since DejaGNU finds test files no matter where they are
6796 located, and since each test file sets up its own compilation and
6797 execution environment, this organization is simply for convenience and
6798 intelligibility.
6799
6800 @table @file
6801 @item gdb.base
6802 This is the base testsuite. The tests in it should apply to all
6803 configurations of @value{GDBN} (but generic native-only tests may live here).
6804 The test programs should be in the subset of C that is valid K&R,
6805 ANSI/ISO, and C@t{++} (@code{#ifdef}s are allowed if necessary, for instance
6806 for prototypes).
6807
6808 @item gdb.@var{lang}
6809 Language-specific tests for any language @var{lang} besides C. Examples are
6810 @file{gdb.cp} and @file{gdb.java}.
6811
6812 @item gdb.@var{platform}
6813 Non-portable tests. The tests are specific to a specific configuration
6814 (host or target), such as HP-UX or eCos. Example is @file{gdb.hp}, for
6815 HP-UX.
6816
6817 @item gdb.@var{compiler}
6818 Tests specific to a particular compiler. As of this writing (June
6819 1999), there aren't currently any groups of tests in this category that
6820 couldn't just as sensibly be made platform-specific, but one could
6821 imagine a @file{gdb.gcc}, for tests of @value{GDBN}'s handling of GCC
6822 extensions.
6823
6824 @item gdb.@var{subsystem}
6825 Tests that exercise a specific @value{GDBN} subsystem in more depth. For
6826 instance, @file{gdb.disasm} exercises various disassemblers, while
6827 @file{gdb.stabs} tests pathways through the stabs symbol reader.
6828 @end table
6829
6830 @section Writing Tests
6831 @cindex writing tests
6832
6833 In many areas, the @value{GDBN} tests are already quite comprehensive; you
6834 should be able to copy existing tests to handle new cases.
6835
6836 You should try to use @code{gdb_test} whenever possible, since it
6837 includes cases to handle all the unexpected errors that might happen.
6838 However, it doesn't cost anything to add new test procedures; for
6839 instance, @file{gdb.base/exprs.exp} defines a @code{test_expr} that
6840 calls @code{gdb_test} multiple times.
6841
6842 Only use @code{send_gdb} and @code{gdb_expect} when absolutely
6843 necessary. Even if @value{GDBN} has several valid responses to
6844 a command, you can use @code{gdb_test_multiple}. Like @code{gdb_test},
6845 @code{gdb_test_multiple} recognizes internal errors and unexpected
6846 prompts.
6847
6848 Do not write tests which expect a literal tab character from @value{GDBN}.
6849 On some operating systems (e.g.@: OpenBSD) the TTY layer expands tabs to
6850 spaces, so by the time @value{GDBN}'s output reaches expect the tab is gone.
6851
6852 The source language programs do @emph{not} need to be in a consistent
6853 style. Since @value{GDBN} is used to debug programs written in many different
6854 styles, it's worth having a mix of styles in the testsuite; for
6855 instance, some @value{GDBN} bugs involving the display of source lines would
6856 never manifest themselves if the programs used GNU coding style
6857 uniformly.
6858
6859 @node Hints
6860
6861 @chapter Hints
6862
6863 Check the @file{README} file, it often has useful information that does not
6864 appear anywhere else in the directory.
6865
6866 @menu
6867 * Getting Started:: Getting started working on @value{GDBN}
6868 * Debugging GDB:: Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
6869 @end menu
6870
6871 @node Getting Started,,, Hints
6872
6873 @section Getting Started
6874
6875 @value{GDBN} is a large and complicated program, and if you first starting to
6876 work on it, it can be hard to know where to start. Fortunately, if you
6877 know how to go about it, there are ways to figure out what is going on.
6878
6879 This manual, the @value{GDBN} Internals manual, has information which applies
6880 generally to many parts of @value{GDBN}.
6881
6882 Information about particular functions or data structures are located in
6883 comments with those functions or data structures. If you run across a
6884 function or a global variable which does not have a comment correctly
6885 explaining what is does, this can be thought of as a bug in @value{GDBN}; feel
6886 free to submit a bug report, with a suggested comment if you can figure
6887 out what the comment should say. If you find a comment which is
6888 actually wrong, be especially sure to report that.
6889
6890 Comments explaining the function of macros defined in host, target, or
6891 native dependent files can be in several places. Sometimes they are
6892 repeated every place the macro is defined. Sometimes they are where the
6893 macro is used. Sometimes there is a header file which supplies a
6894 default definition of the macro, and the comment is there. This manual
6895 also documents all the available macros.
6896 @c (@pxref{Host Conditionals}, @pxref{Target
6897 @c Conditionals}, @pxref{Native Conditionals}, and @pxref{Obsolete
6898 @c Conditionals})
6899
6900 Start with the header files. Once you have some idea of how
6901 @value{GDBN}'s internal symbol tables are stored (see @file{symtab.h},
6902 @file{gdbtypes.h}), you will find it much easier to understand the
6903 code which uses and creates those symbol tables.
6904
6905 You may wish to process the information you are getting somehow, to
6906 enhance your understanding of it. Summarize it, translate it to another
6907 language, add some (perhaps trivial or non-useful) feature to @value{GDBN}, use
6908 the code to predict what a test case would do and write the test case
6909 and verify your prediction, etc. If you are reading code and your eyes
6910 are starting to glaze over, this is a sign you need to use a more active
6911 approach.
6912
6913 Once you have a part of @value{GDBN} to start with, you can find more
6914 specifically the part you are looking for by stepping through each
6915 function with the @code{next} command. Do not use @code{step} or you
6916 will quickly get distracted; when the function you are stepping through
6917 calls another function try only to get a big-picture understanding
6918 (perhaps using the comment at the beginning of the function being
6919 called) of what it does. This way you can identify which of the
6920 functions being called by the function you are stepping through is the
6921 one which you are interested in. You may need to examine the data
6922 structures generated at each stage, with reference to the comments in
6923 the header files explaining what the data structures are supposed to
6924 look like.
6925
6926 Of course, this same technique can be used if you are just reading the
6927 code, rather than actually stepping through it. The same general
6928 principle applies---when the code you are looking at calls something
6929 else, just try to understand generally what the code being called does,
6930 rather than worrying about all its details.
6931
6932 @cindex command implementation
6933 A good place to start when tracking down some particular area is with
6934 a command which invokes that feature. Suppose you want to know how
6935 single-stepping works. As a @value{GDBN} user, you know that the
6936 @code{step} command invokes single-stepping. The command is invoked
6937 via command tables (see @file{command.h}); by convention the function
6938 which actually performs the command is formed by taking the name of
6939 the command and adding @samp{_command}, or in the case of an
6940 @code{info} subcommand, @samp{_info}. For example, the @code{step}
6941 command invokes the @code{step_command} function and the @code{info
6942 display} command invokes @code{display_info}. When this convention is
6943 not followed, you might have to use @code{grep} or @kbd{M-x
6944 tags-search} in emacs, or run @value{GDBN} on itself and set a
6945 breakpoint in @code{execute_command}.
6946
6947 @cindex @code{bug-gdb} mailing list
6948 If all of the above fail, it may be appropriate to ask for information
6949 on @code{bug-gdb}. But @emph{never} post a generic question like ``I was
6950 wondering if anyone could give me some tips about understanding
6951 @value{GDBN}''---if we had some magic secret we would put it in this manual.
6952 Suggestions for improving the manual are always welcome, of course.
6953
6954 @node Debugging GDB,,,Hints
6955
6956 @section Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
6957 @cindex debugging @value{GDBN}
6958
6959 If @value{GDBN} is limping on your machine, this is the preferred way to get it
6960 fully functional. Be warned that in some ancient Unix systems, like
6961 Ultrix 4.2, a program can't be running in one process while it is being
6962 debugged in another. Rather than typing the command @kbd{@w{./gdb
6963 ./gdb}}, which works on Suns and such, you can copy @file{gdb} to
6964 @file{gdb2} and then type @kbd{@w{./gdb ./gdb2}}.
6965
6966 When you run @value{GDBN} in the @value{GDBN} source directory, it will read a
6967 @file{.gdbinit} file that sets up some simple things to make debugging
6968 gdb easier. The @code{info} command, when executed without a subcommand
6969 in a @value{GDBN} being debugged by gdb, will pop you back up to the top level
6970 gdb. See @file{.gdbinit} for details.
6971
6972 If you use emacs, you will probably want to do a @code{make TAGS} after
6973 you configure your distribution; this will put the machine dependent
6974 routines for your local machine where they will be accessed first by
6975 @kbd{M-.}
6976
6977 Also, make sure that you've either compiled @value{GDBN} with your local cc, or
6978 have run @code{fixincludes} if you are compiling with gcc.
6979
6980 @section Submitting Patches
6981
6982 @cindex submitting patches
6983 Thanks for thinking of offering your changes back to the community of
6984 @value{GDBN} users. In general we like to get well designed enhancements.
6985 Thanks also for checking in advance about the best way to transfer the
6986 changes.
6987
6988 The @value{GDBN} maintainers will only install ``cleanly designed'' patches.
6989 This manual summarizes what we believe to be clean design for @value{GDBN}.
6990
6991 If the maintainers don't have time to put the patch in when it arrives,
6992 or if there is any question about a patch, it goes into a large queue
6993 with everyone else's patches and bug reports.
6994
6995 @cindex legal papers for code contributions
6996 The legal issue is that to incorporate substantial changes requires a
6997 copyright assignment from you and/or your employer, granting ownership
6998 of the changes to the Free Software Foundation. You can get the
6999 standard documents for doing this by sending mail to @code{gnu@@gnu.org}
7000 and asking for it. We recommend that people write in "All programs
7001 owned by the Free Software Foundation" as "NAME OF PROGRAM", so that
7002 changes in many programs (not just @value{GDBN}, but GAS, Emacs, GCC,
7003 etc) can be
7004 contributed with only one piece of legalese pushed through the
7005 bureaucracy and filed with the FSF. We can't start merging changes until
7006 this paperwork is received by the FSF (their rules, which we follow
7007 since we maintain it for them).
7008
7009 Technically, the easiest way to receive changes is to receive each
7010 feature as a small context diff or unidiff, suitable for @code{patch}.
7011 Each message sent to me should include the changes to C code and
7012 header files for a single feature, plus @file{ChangeLog} entries for
7013 each directory where files were modified, and diffs for any changes
7014 needed to the manuals (@file{gdb/doc/gdb.texinfo} or
7015 @file{gdb/doc/gdbint.texinfo}). If there are a lot of changes for a
7016 single feature, they can be split down into multiple messages.
7017
7018 In this way, if we read and like the feature, we can add it to the
7019 sources with a single patch command, do some testing, and check it in.
7020 If you leave out the @file{ChangeLog}, we have to write one. If you leave
7021 out the doc, we have to puzzle out what needs documenting. Etc., etc.
7022
7023 The reason to send each change in a separate message is that we will not
7024 install some of the changes. They'll be returned to you with questions
7025 or comments. If we're doing our job correctly, the message back to you
7026 will say what you have to fix in order to make the change acceptable.
7027 The reason to have separate messages for separate features is so that
7028 the acceptable changes can be installed while one or more changes are
7029 being reworked. If multiple features are sent in a single message, we
7030 tend to not put in the effort to sort out the acceptable changes from
7031 the unacceptable, so none of the features get installed until all are
7032 acceptable.
7033
7034 If this sounds painful or authoritarian, well, it is. But we get a lot
7035 of bug reports and a lot of patches, and many of them don't get
7036 installed because we don't have the time to finish the job that the bug
7037 reporter or the contributor could have done. Patches that arrive
7038 complete, working, and well designed, tend to get installed on the day
7039 they arrive. The others go into a queue and get installed as time
7040 permits, which, since the maintainers have many demands to meet, may not
7041 be for quite some time.
7042
7043 Please send patches directly to
7044 @email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com, the @value{GDBN} maintainers}.
7045
7046 @section Obsolete Conditionals
7047 @cindex obsolete code
7048
7049 Fragments of old code in @value{GDBN} sometimes reference or set the following
7050 configuration macros. They should not be used by new code, and old uses
7051 should be removed as those parts of the debugger are otherwise touched.
7052
7053 @table @code
7054 @item STACK_END_ADDR
7055 This macro used to define where the end of the stack appeared, for use
7056 in interpreting core file formats that don't record this address in the
7057 core file itself. This information is now configured in BFD, and @value{GDBN}
7058 gets the info portably from there. The values in @value{GDBN}'s configuration
7059 files should be moved into BFD configuration files (if needed there),
7060 and deleted from all of @value{GDBN}'s config files.
7061
7062 Any @file{@var{foo}-xdep.c} file that references STACK_END_ADDR
7063 is so old that it has never been converted to use BFD. Now that's old!
7064
7065 @end table
7066
7067 @include observer.texi
7068 @raisesections
7069 @include fdl.texi
7070 @lowersections
7071
7072 @node Index
7073 @unnumbered Index
7074
7075 @printindex cp
7076
7077 @bye
This page took 0.216538 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.